Honda 1998 Accord Manual Download Page 225

Page: 225 / 1695

Summary of Contents for 1998 Accord

Page 1: ...d o n e of t h r e e signal w o r d s D A N G E R W A R N I N G or C A U T I O N T h e s e s i g n a l w o r d s m e a n Y o u W I L L be KILLED o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if y o u d o n t f o l l...

Page 2: ...ler To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal collision all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer...

Page 3: ...service safety precautions are given below However we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing service and repair procedures Only you can decide whether or not you sho...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...nd Paint Codes 2000 Model 1 4 Chassis and Paint Codes 2001 Model 1 5 Chassis and Paint Codes 2002 Model 1 6 Identification Number Locations 1 7 Warning Caution Label Locations 1 8 Under hood Emission...

Page 6: ...n N u m b e r a n d F e d e r a l M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification V e h i c l e Identification N u m b e r a n d C a n a d i a n M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S...

Page 7: ...V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification V e h i c l e Identification N u m b e r a n d C a n a d i a n M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification Engine Number F...

Page 8: ...V e h i c l e Identification N u m b e r a n d F e d e r a l M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification V e h i c l e Identification N u m b e r a n d C a n a d i a n M o t o r...

Page 9: ...tory in Mexico h Serial Number 0 0 0 0 0 1 US model 800001 Canada model Vehicle Identification Number and Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification Vehicle Identification Number and Canadian...

Page 10: ...ry in Japan Sayama Serial Number 0 0 0 0 0 1 US model 800001 Canada model Vehicle Identification Number and Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification Vehicle Identification Number and Canadi...

Page 11: ...1 7...

Page 12: ...P P L E M E N T F I R S T AID IF C O N T E N T S A R E S W A L L O W E D I N D U C E V O M I T I N G F O R E Y E C O N T A C T F L U S H E Y E S W I T H W A T E R F O R 15 M I N U T E S IN E V E R Y C...

Page 13: ...00 02 m o d e l s w i t h driver s a n d p a s s e n g e r s a n d front s e a t s s i d e airbags S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M S R S T H I S V E H I C L E IS E Q U I P P E D...

Page 14: ...L L E D B Y T H E A I R B A G T H E B A C K S E A T IS T H E S A F E S T P L A C E F O R C H I L D R E N N E V E R P U T A R E A R F A C I N G C H I L D S E A T IN T H E F R O N T S I T A S F A R B A...

Page 15: ...a g s L o c a t e d o n driver s door j a m b a n d p a s s e n g e r s d o o r j a m b not s h o w n S I D E A I R B A G T H I S C A R I S E Q U I P P E D W I T H S I D E A I R B A G S IN T H E D R...

Page 16: ...R SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TIER 1 LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U S EPA TIER 1 AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES CALIFORNIA LEV THIS VEHICL...

Page 17: ...ER 1 LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U S EPA TIER 1 AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES CALIFORNIA LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U S EPA AND STATE OF C...

Page 18: ...TD FEDERAL THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U S EPA NLEV AND CLEAN FUEL VEHICLE AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO GASOLINE FUELED 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS CERTIFICATION TEST FUEL EPA UNLE...

Page 19: ...LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U S EPA NLEV AND CLEAN FUEL VEHICLE AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO GASOLINE FUELED 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS CALIFORNIA ULEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS T...

Page 20: ...ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED 2 H N X V 0 2 3W87 2HNXR01 3 Q A A F 2 3 L CED 2 3 V A G J J G Honda Motor Co Ltd FEDERAL and CANADIAN TIER 1 THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U S EPA NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2002 M...

Page 21: ...the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands use the same support points B and C as for a frame hoist Always use safety stands when work...

Page 22: ...ansmission to Neutral Automatic Transmission Release the parking brake Start the engine Shift to B position then HI position Turn off the engine It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles...

Page 23: ...self adhesive labels Replacement body parts have generic self adhesive labels The original engine or transmission VIN plate is transferred to a replacement engine or transmission and attached with br...

Page 24: ...R Valve Lift Sensor Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Position EGR Valve Position Sensor Exhaust Gas Recirculation Control Solenoid Valve EGR Control Solenoid Valve Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Vacuu...

Page 25: ...ensor Secondary Air Injection Pump Electric Current Sensor Air Pump Electric Current Sensor Shift Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Set Shift Solenoid and Automatic Transaxle Clutch Pressure Cont...

Page 26: ......

Page 27: ...7 Automatic Transmission and Differential 2 10 Steering 2 16 Suspension 2 16 Brakes 2 17 Air Conditioning 2 17 Design Specifications Dimensions 2 18 Weight U S A 2 18 Weight CANADA 2 18 Engine 2 18 St...

Page 28: ...0 170 lbs to the used belt C o m p r e s s o r spec belt in the A C table Alternator Output At 13 5 V and F23A1 engine 80 A n o r m a l engine F23A4 engine 90 A temperature F23A5 engine 80 A Coil roto...

Page 29: ...2 1 6 3 in 5 455 m m 0 2148 in Exhaust 5 4 5 0 5 4 6 0 m m 0 2 1 4 6 0 2 1 5 0 in 5 420 m m 0 2134 in Stem to guide clearance Intake 0 0 2 0 0 0 4 5 m m 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 8 in 0 08 m m 0 003 in Exhau...

Page 30: ...bearing to journal oil clearance F23A1 1000001 2000001 3000001 4000001 F23A4 1000001 2000001 3000001 4000001 F23A5 1000001 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 3000001 4000001 F23A1 3400001 4400001 F23A4 3400001 4400001 eng...

Page 31: ...and rear shafts 0 0 7 6 0 1 0 8 m m 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 4 3 in 0 13 m m 0 005 in Balancer shaft bearings I D No 1 journal f r o n t shaft 4 2 8 0 0 4 2 8 2 0 m m 1 6850 1 6858 in 42 83 m m 1 686 in Balanc...

Page 32: ...t 5 15 F 3 8 C f r o m actual O N temperature Fuel and Emissions Item Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w Service Limit Fuel pressure regulator Pressure w i t h regulator v a c u u m hose disc...

Page 33: ...3 0 2 5 m m 1 6933 1 6939 in 43 080 m m 1 6961 in Mainshaft 5th gear End play 0 0 6 0 2 1 m m 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 8 in 0 30 m m 0 012 in Mainshaft 5th gear Thickness 3 0 9 2 3 0 9 7 m m 1 2 1 7 1 2 1 9 in...

Page 34: ...ar clearance Ring pushed against gear 0 5 1 0 m m 0 0 2 0 0 4 in 0 3 m m 0 01 in Dual cone synchro Outer synchro ring to gear clearance Ring pushed against gear 0 9 5 1 6 8 m m 0 0 3 7 0 0 6 6 in 0 6...

Page 35: ...nion shaft clearance 0 0 1 7 0 0 4 7 m m 0 0007 0 0019 in 0 1 m m 0 004 in M T differential carrier Driveshaft and intermediate shaft contact area I D 2 8 0 0 5 2 8 0 2 5 m m 1 1026 1 1033 in M T diff...

Page 36: ...3rd 0 6 0 8 m m 0 0 2 4 0 0 3 1 in 4th 0 4 0 6 m m 0 0 1 6 0 0 2 4 in Clutch return s p r i n g free length 1st 2nd 45 7 m m 1 80 in 43 7 m m 1 72 in 3rd 4th 33 5 m m 1 32 in 31 5 m m 1 24 in Clutch...

Page 37: ...r of needle bearing contact area at 4th gear collar 3 3 9 7 5 3 3 9 9 1 m m 1 3 3 7 6 1 3 3 8 2 in When worn damaged Mainshaft I D of 3rd gear 6 1 0 0 0 6 1 0 1 9 m m 2 4 0 1 6 2 4 0 2 3 in When worn...

Page 38: ...g e d I D of 4th gear 4 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 1 6 m m 1 5 7 4 8 1 5 7 5 4 in W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d I D of idler gear 5 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 6 m m 1 9 6 8 5 1 9 6 9 1 in W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d...

Page 39: ...d a r y shaft 37 x 55 m m thrust s h i m thickness No 1 4 90 m m 0 193 in W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d S e c o n d a r y shaft 37 x 55 m m thrust s h i m thickness No 2 4 95 m m 0 195 in W h e n...

Page 40: ...732 in 12 5 Regulator valve b o d y springs see page 14 163 Regulator valve spring A 1 9 m m 0 075 in 14 7 m m 0 579 in 77 4 m m 3 047 in 15 2 Regulator valve b o d y springs see page 14 163 Stator re...

Page 41: ...veshaft clearance 0 0 4 5 0 0 8 6 m m 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 in 0 12 m m 0 005 in A T differential carrier Tapered roller bearing starting torque preload For n e w bearing 2 7 3 9 N m 2 8 4 0 k g f c m 2 4 3...

Page 42: ...eys N e w belt 1 1 0 1 2 5 m m 0 4 3 0 4 9 in Power steering p u m p belt NOTE Adjust a new belt t o t h e n e w belt spec run t h e engine for 5 minutes t h e n readjust it to t h e used belt spec T...

Page 43: ...Brake d r u m I D 2 1 9 9 2 2 0 0 m m 8 6 5 7 8 6 6 1 in 221 m m 8 700 in Brake shoes Lining thickness 4 5 m m 0 18 in 2 0 m m 0 08 in Air Conditioning Item Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w...

Page 44: ...F23A4 engines Water cooled 4 stroke SOHC VTEC gasoline engine F23A5 e n g i n e Water cooled 4 stroke SOHC gasoline engine Cylinder arrangement Inline 4 cylinder transverse Bore and stroke 86 0 x 97 0...

Page 45: ...15 0 in SUSPENSION Type Front Independent double w i s h b o n e coil spring w i t h stabilizer SUSPENSION Type Rear Five link double w i s h b o n e SUSPENSION Shock absorber Front a n d rear Telesco...

Page 46: ...20 A 15 A Under dash driver s 30 A 15 A 10 A 7 5 A fuse relay box Under dash 30 A 20 A 10 A 7 5 A passenger s fuse relay box Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V 6 0 W Headlight low 12 V 5 1 W beam Fr...

Page 47: ...Body Specifications specs cont d 2 21...

Page 48: ...Body Specifications cont d 2 door coupe 2 22...

Page 49: ...stance Time 3 6 Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions 1998 2000 Models Listed by Maintenance Item 3 8 Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions 2001 2002 Models Listed by Distance Tim...

Page 50: ...od 12 Pedal linkage 13 Battery terminals 14 Fuel fill lid 15 Rear brake shoe linkage Honda White Lithium Grease 16 Hood hinges and hood latch 17 Trunk hinges and latch 18 Door hinges upper and lower 1...

Page 51: ...NOTE Lubricate all hinges latches and locks once a year In corrosive areas more frequent lubrication is necessary We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease D 3 3...

Page 52: ...Honda All Season Antifreeze Coolant Type 2 Do items in A a n d B 82 500 mi 132 000 k m Do items in A S S _ _ _ _ S S S 90 000 mi 144 000 k m 6 years Replace spark plugs for 98 99 m o d e l s Use NGK Z...

Page 53: ...see page 13 3 engine coolant brake fluid and w i n d s h i e l d washer fluid Inspect cooling system hoses and connections Check for d a m a g e leaks a n d deterioration Check for proper fan operati...

Page 54: ...Antifreeze Coolant Type 2 Capacity M T 5 5 ft 5 8 US qt 4 8 I m p qt A T 5 4 ft 5 7 US qt 4 8 I m p qt Replace brake fluid see page 19 7 Use G e n u i n e H o n d a DOT 3 Fill t o between marks o n r...

Page 55: ...t bands for tightness see page 16 3 B Check parking brake adjustment S h o u l d be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks disc brake or w i t h i n 4 to 7 clicks drum brake Lubricate locks hinges and lat...

Page 56: ...ner e l e m e n t o Replace air cleaner element Inspect valve clearance Adjust only if noisy Replace spark plugs 98 99 models Replace spark plugs 00 m o d e l Replace t i m i n g belt balancer b e l t...

Page 57: ...o o o o o o o o o NOTE 1 If the vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather over 110 F 43 C or under 20 F 29 C replace this belt every 60 000 miles If not replace it at 105 000 miles 2 Rep...

Page 58: ...ems in A 105 000 mi 168 000 k m 7 years Inspect valve clearance cold see page 6 14 Intake 0 2 4 0 2 8 m m 0 0 0 9 0 0 1 1 in Exhaust 0 28 0 32 m m 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 3 in Replace spark plugs for 01 m o d e...

Page 59: ...coolant brake fluid and windshield washer fluid Inspect cooling s y s t e m hoses and connections Check for d a m a g e leaks and deterioration Check for proper fan operation Inspect exhaust s y s t...

Page 60: ...i 96 000 k m 3 years then every 30 000 mi 48 000 k m 2 years Replace automatic transmission fluid Use Honda ATF Z1 ATF see page 14 113 Capacity 2 5 ft 2 6 US qt 2 21 I m p qt 60 000 m i 96 000 k m 4...

Page 61: ...Check parking brake adjustment S h o u l d be fully applied w i t h i n 6 to 9 clicks disc brake or within 4 t o 7 clicks drum brake Lubricate door locks and hinges with Honda white lithium grease In...

Page 62: ...filter Normal Conditions Every other oil change Severe Conditions Every oil change Clean air cleaner element o Replace air cleaner element Inspect valve clearance Adjust o n l y if noisy Replace spark...

Page 63: ...e Severe Conditions Every oil change o o o Adjust only if noisy o Normal Conditions At 120 000 miles 192 000 km or 10 years then every 60 000 miles 96 000 km or 5 years Severe Conditions At 120 000 mi...

Page 64: ...ect f r o n t and rear brakes O o Replace brake fluid Every 3 years Check parking brake adjustment Replace air conditioning filter N 0 T E Z Lubricate locks hinges and latches o Rotate tires Check tir...

Page 65: ...2 0 F 2 9 C replace this belt every 60 000 miles If not replace it at 105 000 miles 2 Replace the dust and pollen filter every 15 000 miles if the vehicle is driven mostly where air has a high concen...

Page 66: ......

Page 67: ...ation Index 4 27 Circuit Diagram 4 28 Charging Circuit Troubleshooting 4 29 Alternator Replacement 4 32 Alternator Overhaul 4 33 Alternator A C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment 4 39 Alternato...

Page 68: ...ool Number Description Qty A973X 041 XXXXX Vacuum Pump Gauge 0 3 0 in Hg 1 07JGG 001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1 07746 0010400 Driver Attachment 52 x 55 m m 1 07749 0010000 Driver 1 Included in the Belt...

Page 69: ...8 STARTER R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 14 139 S t a r t e r C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p a g e 4 5 S o l e n o i d T e s t p a g e 4 7 P e r f o r m a n c e Test p a g e 4 8 R e p l...

Page 70: ...BLK RED No 41 100A No 42 50A W H T I G N I T I O N S W I T C H B A T No 13 7 5A BLU ORN h P C M PGM FI MAIN RELAY BLK WHT DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BLU WHT M T j CLUTCH L INTERLOCK SWITCH ATT...

Page 71: ...for the following until you find the cause Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch Check the battery condition Check electrical connections at the batter...

Page 72: ...r 280 amps with M T Y E S G o to step 9 NO Replace the starter or remove and disassemble the starter and check for the following until you find the cause Open circuit in starter armature commutator se...

Page 73: ...und There should be continuity If there is continuity go to step 2 If there is no continuity replace the solenoid M T M 2 Check the pull in coil for continuity between the S terminal and M terminal Th...

Page 74: ...tery from the M terminal If the pinion does not retract the hold in coil of the solenoid is working properly 5 Disconnect the battery from the starter body If the pinion retracts immediately it is wor...

Page 75: ...inal M T 8 x 1 25 m m 9 N m 0 9 kgf m 7 Ibfft 10 x 1 25 m m 44 N m 4 5 k g f m 3 3 Ibfft 10 x 1 25 m m 4 4 N m 4 5 k g f m 3 3 Ibfft A T 10 x 1 25 m m 44 N m 4 5 kgf m 33 Ibfft 8 x 1 25 m m 9 N m 0 9...

Page 76: ...N E S S B R A C K E T S T E E L B A L L W h e n r e a s s e m b l i n g install steel ball f r o m c l u t c h s i d e O V E R R U N N I N G C L U T C H A S S E M B L Y M O L Y B D E N U M D I S U L F...

Page 77: ...Disassembly Reassembly A T E N D C O V E R O V E R R U N N I N G C L U T C H A S S E M B L Y cont d 4 11...

Page 78: ...fications or recondition with 500 or 600 sandpaper B 5 Check the commutator diameter If the diameter is below the service limit replace the armature Commutator Diameter Standard New M T 29 9 30 0 mm 1...

Page 79: ...5 m m 0 006 in 8 Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator If an open circuit exists between any segments replace the armature 9 Place the armature A on an armature tester B Hold a h...

Page 80: ...Service Limit M T 10 0 mm 0 39 in A T 11 0 mm 0 43 in Starter Field Winding Test M T 12 Check for continuity between the brushes A If there is no continuity replace the armature housing B A B 13 Check...

Page 81: ...en position the brush about halfway out of its holder and release the spring to hold it there NOTE To seat new brushes slip a strip of 500 or 600 sandpaper with the grit side up between the commutator...

Page 82: ...along the shaft Replace it if it does not slide smoothly 21 Rotate the overrunning clutch A both ways Does it lock in one direction and rotate smoothly in reverse If it does not lock in either direct...

Page 83: ...Ignition System Component Location Index Ignition Coil Test page 4 24 IGNITION WIRES Ignition Timing Inspection page 4 19 Inspection and Test page 4 25 4 17...

Page 84: ...IG1 HOT in ON II and S T A R T III BLK YEL No 6 15A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX ECM PCM BLK YEL DISTRIBUTOR YEL GRN BLK YEL A IGNITION COIL F23A1 F23A4 engines WHT BLK F23A5 engine WHT BLU BLK...

Page 85: ...on the timing belt cover Check the ignition timing in no load conditions headlights blower fan rear window defogger and air conditioner are not operating Ignition Timing M T 12 2 BTDC RED mark B duri...

Page 86: ...r into position NOTE The lugs on the end of the distributor and their mating grooves in the camshaft end B are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180 out of time 4...

Page 87: ...Distributor Overhaul F23A1 F23A4 Engines I G N I T I O N C O N T R O L M O D U L E ICM 4 21...

Page 88: ...Ignition System Distributor Overhaul F23A5 Engine L E A K C O V E R 4 22...

Page 89: ...tage check the BLK YEL wire between the ignition switch and the ICM If there is battery voltage go to step 4 4 Turn the ignition switch ON II Check for voltage between the WHT BLK WHT BLU for the F23A...

Page 90: ...e resistance between the terminals Replace the coil if the resistance is not within specifications NOTE Resistance will vary with the coil temperature specifications are at 68 F 20 C Primary Winding R...

Page 91: ...als If any terminal is corroded clean it and if it is broken or distorted replace the ignition wire c o r r o d e d a n d b e n t t e r m i n a l s 3 Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance whi...

Page 92: ...n d e p o s i t s Cracked c e n t e r electrode i n s u l a t o r C r a c k e d insulator 2 Check the electrode gap 98 99 models Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool Electrode Gap Standard New...

Page 93: ...Charging System Component Location Index 4 27...

Page 94: ...Charging System Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX B A T T E R Y BLK No 41 1 0 0 A 4 28...

Page 95: ...regulator in the alternator may be damaged N O G o to step 9 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the alternator 8 Connect the alternator 4P connector terminal...

Page 96: ...ductive pick up and zero the ammeter 8 Place the inductive pick up over the B terminal wire of the alternator so that the arrow points away from the alternator 9 Raise the engine speed to 2 000 rpm an...

Page 97: ...nal C2 and body ground E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 31P A L T C W H T G R N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 1 6 1718192021 23 25 262728 2930 V W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there con...

Page 98: ...nd BLK wire B from the alternator A 4 Remove the adjusting bolt A locknut B and mounting bolt C then remove the alternator belt and alternator C 10 x 1 25 m m 44 N m 4 5 k g f m 33 Ibfft 8 x 1 25 m m...

Page 99: ...Alternator Overhaul Exploded View S P A C E R R I N G E N D C O V E R B R U S H H O L D E R I N S U L A T O R cont d 4 33...

Page 100: ...em see step 1 on page 4 30 2 Remove the alternator see page 4 32 3 If the front bearing needs replacing remove the pulley locknut with a 10 m m wrench A and a 22 m m wrench B If necessary use an impac...

Page 101: ...cont d 4 35...

Page 102: ...nd inspect the bearing journal surface in the stator housing for seizure marks If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged replace the alternator If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK g...

Page 103: ...d between the E terminal C and P terminals B of each diode pair All diodes should have continuity in only one direction Because the rectifier diodes are designed to allow current to pass in one direct...

Page 104: ...ng A and the rotor B and the rotor shaft C If there is no continuity go to step 22 If there is continuity replace the alternator Stator Test 22 Check that there is continuity between each pair of lead...

Page 105: ...nd mounting bolt 5 Recheckthe belt tension 6 If you installed a new belt run the engine for 5 minutes then readjust the belt to the used belt specification 7 Check the power steering pump belt adjustm...

Page 106: ...t tension 5 If you installed a new belt run the engine for 5 minutes then readjust the belt to the used belt specification 6 Check the power steering pump belt adjustment see page 17 12 Deflection Met...

Page 107: ...ntrol Component Location Index T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H A T T e s t p a g e 14 138 A C T U A T O R Test p a g e 4 51 S o l e n o i d Test p a g e 4 50 R e l a c e m e n t p a g e...

Page 108: ...Control Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY B O X I G N I T I O N S W I T C H D R I V E R S U N D E R D A S H FUSE RELAY B O X B A T T E R Y C O M B I N A T I O N L I G H T S W I T C H G302 G401 G50...

Page 109: ...tor and vent line for the actuator see page 4 51 3 Check control unit see page 4 46 Excessive overshooting or undershooting when trying to set speed 1 Check actuator and vent line for the actuator see...

Page 110: ...page 4 46 Open circuit loose or disconnected terminals LT GRN RED LT GRN BLK Set speed will not resume when RESUME button is pushed with main switch on when set speed is temporarily cancelled by pres...

Page 111: ...uise control unit connector 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Connect a voltmeter between cruise control unit 14P connector terminal No 8 and body ground Test drive the vehicle at speeds over 25mph 4...

Page 112: ...is not obtained 9 BRN WHT Under all conditions Check for resistance to ground There should be 8 0 1 2 0 Q Faulty actuator solenoid Poor ground G401 An open in the wire Short to ground 1 BRN Under all...

Page 113: ...T Ignition switch ON II and main switch ON raise the front of the vehicle and rotate one wheel slowly while holding the other wheel Check for voltage between the BLU WHT and B L K terminals Cycles abo...

Page 114: ...s not as specified replace the switch Set Resume Cancel Switch Test Replacement 1 Remove the two screws A then remove the switch B T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s 2 Check for continu...

Page 115: ...e table T e r m i n a l 2 3 C l u t c h S w i t c h 2 3 P R E S S E D o O R E L E A S E D 4 If necessary replace the switch or adjust the pedal height see page 12 4 Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1...

Page 116: ...rature specified resistance is at 70 F 20 C T e r m i n a l 1 2 3 4 R e s i s t a n c e Q 1 2 3 4 VENT S O L E N O I D 4 0 6 0 Q r f VENT S O L E N O I D 4 0 6 0 Q V A C U U M S O L E N O I D 3 0 5 0...

Page 117: ...out by hand You should not be able to pull it out If you can it is defective 6 Disconnect ground from the No 3 terminal The actuator rod should return If it does not return but the vent hose and filte...

Page 118: ...et 3 Disconnect the vacuum hose C 4 Remove the three nuts A 5 Disconnect the actuator cable B from the actuator rod C by releasing the clip D from the rod with a screwdriver 6 Loosen the locknut A the...

Page 119: ...Disassembly Reassembly A C T U A T O R CABLE A C T U A T O R B R A C K E T 4 53...

Page 120: ...ed at the fully closed position C The free play D should be 3 75 0 5 m m 0 15 0 02 in If the free play is not within specs move the cable to the point where the engine speed starts to increase and tig...

Page 121: ...Engine Mount Control System Component Location Index REAR MOUNT POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE PCM Troubleshooting page 4 57 4 55...

Page 122: ...m Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX BATTERY No 41 100A No 42 50A W H T D R I V E R S U N D E R D A S H F U S E R E L A Y B O X BLK YEL E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L...

Page 123: ...ount control system is OK B N O G o to step 4 4 Shift to HI or E position 5 Disconnect the 2P connector from the engine mount control solenoid valve 6 Measure voltage between the No 2 terminal and bod...

Page 124: ...engine mount control solenoid valve B and connect a vacuum pump gauge to the hose Apply vacuum for 20 seconds A B Does the engine mount hold vacuum YES G o t o step 11 NO Either the vacuum hose or the...

Page 125: ...Engine Mechanical Engine Assembly Engine Removal 5 2 Engine Installation 5 10 Cylinder Head 6 1 Engine Block 7 1 Engine Lubrication 8 1 Intake Manifold Exhaust System 9 1 Engine Cooling 10 1...

Page 126: ...de for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio s preset buttons 3 Disconnect the battery negative terminal first then the positive terminal 4 Remove the intake air duct A 6 Disconnect...

Page 127: ...AP canister hose B vacuum hose C and P S hose clamp D A B D 12 Remove the mounting bolts A then remove the Power Steering P S pump belt B and pump without disconnecting the P S hoses A 13 Remove the a...

Page 128: ...dule PCM connectors from the ECM PCM 15 Remove the grommet A then pull out the ECM PCM connectors 5 4 16 Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on the right side of the engine compartment 17 Re...

Page 129: ...ly M T NOTE Do not disconnect the line hose assembly Do not operate the clutch pedal once the slave cylinder has been removed Take care not to bend the line 20 Remove the rear engine mount bracket mou...

Page 130: ...see page 10 10 28 Drain the Manual Transmission Fluid MTF see page 13 3 or Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF see page 14 113 Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer 29 Drain the engine oil Reinstal...

Page 131: ...o remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder before removing the bolts securing the shift cable cover A T 36 Remove the lock bolt D securing the control lever E then remove the shift cable F wit...

Page 132: ...moval cont d 40 Remove the rear engine mount bracket M T 98 00 models A T 01 02 models A T 41 Remove the flange bolts securing the radius rods 42 Mark the front beam A and rear beam B f then remove th...

Page 133: ...bracket 47 Check that the engine transmission is completely free of vacuum hoses fuel and coolant hoses and electrical wiring 48 Slowly lower the engine about 150 m m 6 in Check once again that all ho...

Page 134: ...mbly Engine Installation 1 Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques 1 0 x 1 2 5 m m 8 x 1 25 m m 4 9 N m 5 0 k g f m 3 6 Ibf ft 2 2 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 I...

Page 135: ...ft 1 2 x 1 25 m m 54 N m 5 5 k g f m 40 Ibf ft D 12 x 1 25 m m 54 N m 5 5 k g f m 40 Ibf ft 8 x 1 25 m m 22 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibf ft 12 x 1 25 m m 54 N m 5 5 kgf m 40 Ibf ft 4 Install the stop B 5 I...

Page 136: ...5 k g f m 47 Ibfft 9 Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods 14 x 1 5 m m 162 N m 16 5 k g f m 119 Ibfft 10 Install the rear mount bracket then tighten the bolts M T 12 x 1 25 m m 54 N m 5 5 k g f...

Page 137: ...t 14 Tighten the front mount bracket mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown D 10 x 1 25 m m 38 N m 3 9 k g f m 2 8 Ibf ft 6 4 N m 6 5 k g f m 47 Ibf ft R e p l a c e A T A 12 x 1 25 m m 54 N m...

Page 138: ...se new gaskets B and new self locking nuts C 10 x 1 25 mm 54 N m 5 5 kgfm 40 Ibf ft 10 x 1 25 mm 33 Nm 3 4 kgf m 25 Ibf ft 21 Install the control lever A with the shift cable B on the control shaft Do...

Page 139: ...eels 28 Lower the hoist 29 Install the clutch slave cylinder and line hose assembly Take care not to bend the line M T 6 x 1 0 mm 9 8 NmH O kgfm 8 7 Ibf ft 8x 1 25 mm 23 Nm 2 3 kgfm 17 lbfft 30 Instal...

Page 140: ...eering P S pump belt see page 17 12 34 Install the starter cable A wire harness clamp B ground cable C and back up light switch connectors D D 35 Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the righ...

Page 141: ...B using new washers C 40 Install the cruise control cable then adjust the cable see page 4 54 41 Install the throttle cable then adjust the cable see page 11 134 42 Install the under hood fuse relay b...

Page 142: ...r valve open see page 10 10 48 Move the shift lever to each gear and verify that the A T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch A T 49 Check that the transmission shifts into ge...

Page 143: ...6 26 Cylinder Head Removal 6 30 Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage 6 35 Rocker Arm Assembly Removal 6 35 Rocker Arms shafts Disassembly Reassembly F23A1 F23A4 Engines 6 36 Rocker Arms shafts Disasse...

Page 144: ...PY3010A Holder Attachment 50 mm Offset 1 07NAF PT0010A Installer Cup 1 07NAF PT0020A Installer Shaft 1 07NAG PT0010A Seal Guide 1 07NAJ P07010A Pressure Gauge Adaptor 1 i 07406 0020201 A T Pressure H...

Page 145: ...C R A N K S H A F T P U L L E Y B O L T R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 6 18 A D J U S T I N G N U T T I M I N G B E L T A D J U S T I N G B O L T T I M I N G B E L T I n s p e c t i o n p a g e 6 19 A...

Page 146: ...Cylinder Head Component Location Index cont d 6 4...

Page 147: ...S E A T I N T A K E V A L V E G U I D E R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 6 44 S E A L Installation p a g e 6 49 F I L T E R V T E C L O S T M O T I O N S P R I N G V A L V E K E E P E R S S P R I N G R E...

Page 148: ...p a g e 6 42 I N T A K E V A L V E S E A L V A L V E S P R I N G S E A T I N T A K E V A L V E G U I D E R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 6 44 S P R I N G R E T A I N E R C A M S H A F T P U L L E Y R e...

Page 149: ...1259 indicated Y E S G o to step 5 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Check for poor connections or loose wires at VTEC solenoid valve and ECM PCM 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Disco...

Page 150: ...stall the special tools as shown then reinstall the VTEC oil pressure switch 07406 0070300 0 7 N A J P 0 7 0 1 0 A 22 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibfft 07406 0020201 o r 0 7 M A J P Y 4 0 1 1 A a n d 0 7 M A J...

Page 151: ...f e m a l e t e r m i n a l Is there continuity YES Repair short in the wire between the ECM PCM B12 and VTEC solenoid valve connector NO Substitute a known good ECM PCM and recheck If symptom indicat...

Page 152: ...olenoid valve assembly A from the cylinder head and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter O ring B for clogging If there is clogging replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil 4 If the filter is...

Page 153: ...k that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly If any rocker arm needs replacing replace the primary mid and secondary rocker arms as an assembly and test If the intake mid rocker...

Page 154: ...he specified air pressure applied and the piston at TDC push up the timing plate A 2 3 mm 0 08 0 12 in at the plate end then release it The synchronizing piston will pop out and engage the intake mid...

Page 155: ...ynchronizing pistons B will snap back to their original positions Visually check the disengagement of the synchronizing pistons A B Replace the intake rocker arms as an assembly if either piston does...

Page 156: ...g to check Intake 0 26 mm 0 010 in 0 02 mm 0 0008 in Exhaust 0 30 mm 0 012 in 0 02 mm 0 0008 in Valve Adjusting Screw Locations INTAKE No 4 No 3 No 2 No 1 No 4 No 3 No 2 EXHAUST No 1 Insert the feeler...

Page 157: ...crankshaft pulley 180 counterclockwise to bring No 4 piston to TDC Grooves A are visible again Number 4 Piston at TDC A 10 Check and if necessary adjust the valve clearance on No 4 cylinder 11 Rotate...

Page 158: ...amshaft as shown 6 Insert the cross shaft C through the top hole of the two uprights Intake Valve Seals 7 Select the 7 8 in diameter long compressor attachment and fasten the attachment to the No 5 ho...

Page 159: ...towels over the oil passages to prevent the valve keepers from falling into the cylinder head 17 Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the compres...

Page 160: ...0 7 J A A 0 0 1 0 2 0 A or Commercially available 2 Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket C and breaker bar 2 Install the crankshaft pulley and hold with holder handle A and holder attachmen...

Page 161: ...l back the boot and remove the 6 mm nut C 3 Disconnect the connector D from the alternator 4 Remove the cylinder head cover 5 Remove the upper cover 6 Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coo...

Page 162: ...ket 1 Make sure you have the anti theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio s preset buttons 2 Disconnect the battery negative terminal first then the positive terminal 3...

Page 163: ...sting nut then remove the lower cover 11 Install the crankshaft pulley 12 Inspect the balancer belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking Replace the belt if it is oil or coolant soaked Remove any oil...

Page 164: ...sconnect the alternator wire harness 1 Pull up the lock A then release the wire harness tie B 2 Pull back the boot and remove the 6 mm nut C 3 Disconnect the connector D from the alternator 4 Remove t...

Page 165: ...y negative terminal first then the positive terminal 3 Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TDC mark A lines up with the pointer B B A 4 Remove the front tires wheels 5 Remove the splash shield 6 Loosen...

Page 166: ...0 Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan 11 Remove the stopper A and ground cable B then remove the upper bracket C 12 Remove the cylinder head cover 13 Remove the upper cover...

Page 167: ...from the balancer belt 1 Install a 6 mm bolt A from the timing cover through the hole in the end of the timing belt adjuster arm to temporarily lock the arm in place 2 Loosen the adjusting nut B 2 3 1...

Page 168: ...UP mark A on the camshaft pulley should be at the top 2 Align the TDC grooves B on the pulley with the top edge of the head A 5 Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence starting with the...

Page 169: ...pulley so its TDC mark A lines up with the pointer B B 14 Check the camshaft pulley marks If the camshaft pulley marks are also at TDC go to step 15 If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC remove...

Page 170: ...he bolt to 29 N m 3 0 kgf m 22 Ib ft 23 Adjust the balancer belt 1 Temporarily reinstall the crankshaft pulley 2 Loosen the adjusting nut 2 3 1 turn 3 Turn the crankshaft pulley 1 turn counterclockwis...

Page 171: ...Install the alternator see page 4 32 37 Connect the alternator harness 38 Install and adjust the power steering pump belt see page 17 12 39 Install and adjust the alternator belt see page 4 40 40 Inst...

Page 172: ...wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection Also be sure that they do not contact other wiring or hoses or interfere with other parts 1 Make sure you have the anti theft code for the radio then write dow...

Page 173: ...cont d 6 31...

Page 174: ...13 Remove the alternator belt 1 Loosen the alternator mounting bolt A 2 Loosen the alternator locknut B 3 Loosen the adjusting bolt C 4 Remove the alternator belt D A 14 Disconnect the alternator wir...

Page 175: ...23A1 F23A5 engine Air Fuel Ratio A F sensor connector F23A4 engine Engine Coolant Temperature ECT sensor connector Radiator fan switch connector Coolant temperature gauge sending unit connector 98 00...

Page 176: ...cover B 23 Remove the exhaust manifold cover A then remove the exhaust manifold B A V 24 Remove the intake manifold 25 Remove the cylinder head bolts To prevent warpage unscrew the bolts in sequence...

Page 177: ...esurface cylinder head Maximum resurface limit is 0 2 mm 0 008 in based on a height of 100 mm 3 94 in Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Cylinder Head Height Standard New 99 95 100 05 mm 3 935 3 939 in P R E...

Page 178: ...ge 6 38 The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly do not remove the camshaft holder bolts The bolts will keep the holders sp...

Page 179: ...e camshaft holder bolts The bolts will keep the holders springs and rocker arms on the shaft Prior to reassembling clean all the parts in solvent dry them and apply lubricant to any contact points E X...

Page 180: ...r Arm to Shaft Clearance Standard New Intake 0 026 0 067 m m 0 0010 0 0026 in Exhaust 0 018 0 054 m m 0 0007 0 0021 in Service Limit 0 08 mm 0 003 in Inspect r o c k e r a r m face f o r w e a r 4 Rep...

Page 181: ...move smoothly replace the rocker arm set NOTE When reassembling the primary rocker arm B carefully apply air pressure to its oil passage Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling B 6 Assemble each t...

Page 182: ...ft holders from the cylinder head 5 Lift the camshaft out of the cylinder head wipe them clean then inspect the lift ramps Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted scored or excessively worn 6 Cle...

Page 183: ...nout Standard New 0 03 mm 0 001 in max Service Limit 0 04 mm 0 002 in 10 Measure cam lobe height Cam Lobe Height Standard New INTAKE EXHAUST F23A1 F23A4 engines PRI 37 775 m m 1 4872 in 38 366 m m 1 5...

Page 184: ...ach item can be reinstalled in its original position 1 Using an appropriate sized socket A and plastic mallet B lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers 2 Install the spring compress...

Page 185: ...ent exceeds the service limit recheck it using a new valve If the measurement is now within the service limit reassemble using a new valve If the measurement with a new valve still exceeds the service...

Page 186: ...50 C Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer Do not get the head hotter than 300 F 150 C excessive heat may loosen the valve seats 4 Working from the camshaft side use the driver and an air...

Page 187: ...e 21 20 22 20 mm 0 835 0 874 in Exhaust 20 63 21 63 mm 0 812 0 852 in 9 Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil 10 Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore 0 7 H A...

Page 188: ...the seat inspect for even valve seating Apply Prussian Blue compound A to the valve face Insert the valve in its original location in the head then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several...

Page 189: ...1 841 1 872 in Service Limit 47 80 mm 1 882 in Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height Standard New 46 68 47 48 mm 1 838 1 869 in Service Limit 47 73 mm 1 879 in 8 If valve stem installed height is over...

Page 190: ...C has a black spring D and intake valve seal E has a white spring F They are not interchangeable 5 Install the valve spring and valve retainer Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coil...

Page 191: ...Clean and install the oil control orifice A with a new O ring B 3 Turn the camshaft until its keyway C is facing up No 1 piston TDC 4 Loosen all the valve adjusting screws 5 Apply liquid gasket to the...

Page 192: ...heck the back cover rubber seal for cranks and other damage NOTE If the rubber seal is coming off reattach it with liquid gasket Wipe off any excess liquid gasket When replacing the seal clean the low...

Page 193: ...pump 4 Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC 1 The U P mark A on the camshaft pulley should be at the top 2 Align the TDC grooves B on the pulley with the top edge of the head A B 5 Install the...

Page 194: ...TORQUE SEQUENCE 10 Mark the bolt head A and the cylinder head B as shown 11 Tighten the cylinder head bolts until the mark on the bolt head aligns with the second mark on the cylinder head turn the bo...

Page 195: ...aust manifold gasket C 8 x 1 25 n u n 2 2 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibfft 8 x 1 2 5 m m 1 0 x 1 2 5 m m 31 N m 3 2 k g f m 54 N m 5 5 k g f m 23 Ibfft 40 Ibfft 14 Install the exhaust pipe A with a new gasket...

Page 196: ...uid gasket part No 08718 0001 or 08718 0003 to the head cover gasket at the four corners of the recesses A NOTE Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket...

Page 197: ...at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil 10 Enter the anti theft code for the radio then enter the customer s radio station presets 1 Remove the balancer belt see page 6 23 2 Remove the...

Page 198: ......

Page 199: ...r Shafts Inspection 7 15 Crankshaft Piston and Balancer Shaft Removal 7 18 Crankshaft Inspection 7 21 Block and Piston Inspection 7 22 Cylinder Honing 7 24 Piston Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement 7...

Page 200: ...ber Description Qty 07GAF SE00200 Hub Assembly Guide Attachment 07LAB PV00100 Ring Gear Holder 1 07LAD PT3010A Seal Driver 1 07746 0030300 Attachment 30 mm I D 1 07749 0010000 Driver 1 07948 SB00101 o...

Page 201: ...Component Location Index cont d 7 3...

Page 202: ...Engine Block Component Location Index cont d E N G I N E B L O C K E N D C O V E R C R A N K S H A F T O I L S E A L P U L L E Y E N D I n s t a l l a t i o n p a g e 7 37 a n d p a g e 8 7 7 4...

Page 203: ...cont d 7 5...

Page 204: ...e 7 25 P I S T O N PIN R e m o v a l p a g e 7 25 I n s t a l l a t i o n p a g e 7 25 I n s p e c t i o n p a g e 7 25 E N G I N E B L O C K Cylinder b o r e i n s p e c t i o n page 7 22 W a r p a g...

Page 205: ...e sequence shown 0 7 L A B P V 0 0 1 0 0 Inspect ring g e a r t e e t h for w e a r or d a m a g e 12 x 1 0 m m 103 N m 10 5 k g f m 76 Ibfft 4 Install the transmission see page 13 10 Drive Plate Remo...

Page 206: ...erance install a new connecting rod and recheck If it is still out of tolerance replace the crankshaft see page 7 18 Play inspection 5 Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator and zero...

Page 207: ...0 0004 0 0013 in Service Limit No 1 2 4 0 050 mm 0 0020 in No 3 0 055 mm 0 0022 in No 5 0 040 mm 0 0016 in JAPAN Produced F23 A1 2500001 F23A4 2500001 Standard New No 1 4 0 013 No 2 No 3 No 5 0 037 m...

Page 208: ...scrub them with a wire brush or scraper Clean them only with solvent or detergent N o 1 B O R E P U L L E Y E N D N o 5 B O R E D R I V E P L A T E E N D Main Journal Code Locations 2 The Main Journal...

Page 209: ...5 0 0 0 0 1 F 2 3 A 4 2 5 0 0 0 0 1 No 1 4 J o u r n a l s B e a r i n g Identification C o l o r c o d e is on t h e e d g e of the bearing L a r g e r crank bore 1 or A or I 2 or i B or II 3 or C or...

Page 210: ...r e e n B r o w n B r o w n G r e e n G r e e n B r o w n B r o w n B r o w n B l a c k G r e e n B r o w n B r o w n B r o w n Black B l a c k B r o w n B r o w n B l a c k Black B l a c k B l u e S...

Page 211: ...depending on the size of its big end bore It s then stamped with a number or bar 1 2 3 or 4 I II III or llll indicating the range You may find any combination of numbers and bars in any engine Half th...

Page 212: ...O U R N A L P U L L E Y E N D No 4 J O U R N A L D R I V E P L A T E E N D 4 Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes to select appropriate replacement bearings from the following table NOTE C...

Page 213: ...cer shaft then pull the shaft firmly back toward the indicator If end play is excessive inspect the thrust washer and the thrust surfaces on the driven gear and the oil pump body NOTE The thickness of...

Page 214: ...ls front E 38 712 1 5241 No 3 journals front G 34 722 1 3670 42 734 mm 1 6824 in 20 950 mm 0 8248 in and rear F 38 724 mm 1 5246 in and rear H 34 734 mm 1 3675 in Service Limit No 1 journal Front C 42...

Page 215: ...1 02 mm 0 828 in No 2 journals front E and rear F 38 83 mm 1 529 in No 3 journals front G and rear H 34 83 mm 1 371 in C E G r J J r L ocoo f J J 13 Calculate the shaft to bearings oil clearances BEAR...

Page 216: ...4 Drive an oil pan seal cutter between the oil pan and cylinder block 5 Cut the oil pan seal by striking the side of the cutter to slide the cutter along the oil pan Remove the oil pan 6 Remove the r...

Page 217: ...pump B A c 13 Remove the baffle plate C 14 Remove the 6 m m bolts To prevent warpage unscrew the bolts in sequence 1 3 turn at a time repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened o o V o TOR p gz...

Page 218: ...s on the engine in the proper order 23 If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder remove it with a ridge reamer A Follow the reamer manufacturer s instructions If...

Page 219: ...ference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit Crankshaft Total Indicator Runout Standard New 0 03 mm 0 001 in max Service Limit 0 04 mm 0 002 in Out of Round and...

Page 220: ...Letter or A 85 970 mm 3 3846 in B 85 960 mm 3 3842 in S K I R T 16 0 m m 0 63 in D I A M E T E R Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at 3 levels in each cylinder as shown If measurements in a...

Page 221: ...t 0 10 mm 0 004 in PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE 7 Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and the piston diameter If the clearance is near or exceeds the service limit inspect the pisto...

Page 222: ...lent Do not use stones that are worn or broken 3 When honing is complete thoroughly clean the engine block of all metal particles Wash the cylinder bores with hot soapy water then dry and oil them imm...

Page 223: ...ined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores B NOTE Take care not to damage the ring grooves 3 Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to about 158 F 70 C then remove the piston pin 2 Remove b...

Page 224: ...imit 21 954 m m 0 8643 in 2 Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter 3 Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston Piston Pin to Piston Cl...

Page 225: ...e in the piston the bore in the connecting rod and the piston pin with engine oil 3 Heat the piston to about 158 F 70 C 4 Install the piston pin A Assemble the piston B and connecting rod C with the e...

Page 226: ...0 20 0 35 mm 0 008 0 014 in Service Limit 0 60 mm 0 024 in Second Ring Standard New 0 40 0 55 mm 0 016 0 022 in Service Limit 0 70 mm 0 028 in Oil Ring Standard New 0 20 0 70 mm 0 008 0 028 in Servic...

Page 227: ...on the ring end gaps as shown S E C O N D R I N G G A P about 90 D O N O T p o s i t i o n a n y ring g a p at piston t h r u s t s u r f a c e s T O P R I N G G A P D O N O T position a n y ring g a...

Page 228: ...ard force on the ring compressor B to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore 5 Stop after the ring compressor pops free and check the connecting rod to crank journal alignm...

Page 229: ...orce on the ring compressor B to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore Connecting Rod Boit Inspection 1 Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and poi...

Page 230: ...ps and bolts finger tight 9 Rotate the crankshaft clockwise seat the journals into connecting rod No 2 D and connecting rod No 3 E Install the connecting rod caps and bolts finger tight Install caps s...

Page 231: ...th a feeler gauge Clearance 0 5 0 8 mm 0 02 0 03 in 19 Clean and dry the right side cover mating surfaces Apply a light coat of oil to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal 20 Apply liquid gasket...

Page 232: ...or 08718 0003 evenly to the block mating surface of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the bolt holes 3 Grease the lips of the oil seals and apply oil to the new O ring B 4 Install the dowel pin...

Page 233: ...the thrust surfaces of the balancer gears as shown A 28 Install the balancer driven gear 1 Remove the bolt A and washer B from the maintenance hole C 2 Scribe a line on a 6 x 100 m m bolt 74 m m from...

Page 234: ...he cylinder block mating surfaces 32 Apply liquid gasket part No 08718 0009 evenly to the cylinder block mating surface of the oil pan and to the inner threads of the bolt holes then install the oil p...

Page 235: ...check that the oil seal lip is not distorted Balancer Shaft Seals Installation In car Special Tools Required Hub Assembly Guide Attachment 07GAF SE00200 Attachment 30 mm I D 07746 0030300 1 Dry the cr...

Page 236: ...he special tools drive the crankshaft oil seal into the right side cover to the point where the clearance between the bottom of the crankshaft oil seal and right side cover is 0 5 0 8 m m 0 02 0 03 in...

Page 237: ...chanical Engine Lubrication Special Tools 8 2 Component Location Index 8 3 Oil Pressure Switch Test 8 4 Oil Pressure Test 8 4 Engine Oil Replacement 8 5 Engine Oil Filter Replacement 8 6 Oil Pump Over...

Page 238: ...Engine Lubrication Special Tools Number Tool Number Description Qty 07LAD PT3010A Seal Driver 1 D 07746 0010300 Attachment 42 X 47 m m 1 07749 0010000 Driver 1 07912 6110001 Oil Filter Wrench 1 8 2...

Page 239: ...Component Location Index B A L A N C E R D R I V E N G E A R 8 3...

Page 240: ...nning check the engine oil level If the oil level is correct 1 Connect a tachometer or a Honda PGM Tester 2 Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install an oil pressure gauge A A 3 Start the engi...

Page 241: ...00 km or 6 months Severe conditions 1 Warm up the engine 2 Remove the drain bolt A and drain the engine oil A 44 N m 4 5 kgf m 33 Ibf ft Do not overtighten 3 Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer...

Page 242: ...m 16 Ibf ft 07912 6110001 5 If eight numbers 1 to 8 are printed around the outside of the filter use the following procedure to tighten the filter Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats again...

Page 243: ...y l i q u i d g a s k e t t o m a t i n g s u r f a c e o f t h e c y l i n d e r b l o c k w h e n i n s t a l l i n g R E L I E F V A L V E V a l v e m u s t s l i d e f r e e l y in h o u s i n g b...

Page 244: ...seal cutter see page 7 18 8 Remove the oil pan and the oil screen A 9 Remove the mounting bolts and the oil pump assembly B 10 Remove the screws from the pump housing then separate the housing and cov...

Page 245: ...4 0 007 in Service Limit 0 21 mm 0 008 in 14 inspect both rotors and the pump housing for scoring or other damage Replace parts if necessary 15 Remove the old oil seals from the oil pump 16 Gently tap...

Page 246: ...check the seals for distortion NOTE Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket Instead reapply liquid gasket after removing the old residue 6 x 1 0 m m 12...

Page 247: ...to the line you scribed 4 Install the balancer driven gear E A 12 x 1 5 m m 29 N m 3 0 k g f m 22 Ibfft 26 Install the balancer gear case A 1 Apply clean engine oil to the new O ring B 2 Hold the rea...

Page 248: ...ply a 4 mm wide bead of liquid gasket Apply a second bead where the two ends of the first bead ends meet Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket Instead...

Page 249: ...Engine Mechanical Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement...

Page 250: ...eplace if cracked or if mating surface is d a m a g e d G A S K E T Replace 8 x 1 25 m m 22 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibfft T H R O T T L E B O D Y 8 x 1 25 m m 22 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibfft 6 x 1 0 m m 12 N m...

Page 251: ...et Replace with a new gasket if damaged 8 x 1 25 mm 22 N m 2 2 kgfm 16 Ibfft COVER EXHAUST MANIFOLD PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR H02S 44 N m 4 5 kgfm 32 Ibfft GASKET Replace SELF LOCKING NUT 8 x 1 25...

Page 252: ...ation cont d F23A4 engine NOTE Use new gaskets and self locking nuts when reassembling Check for folds or scratches on the surface of the gasket Replace with a new gasket if damaged 8 x 1 25 m m 2 2 N...

Page 253: ...X H A U S T P I P E B H E A T S H I E L D 6 x 1 0 m m 12 N m 1 2 k g f m 8 7 Ibfft S E C O N D A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R H 0 2 S 44 N m 4 5 k g f m 3 3 Ibfft E X H A U S T PIPE A S E L...

Page 254: ...er Replacement cont d F23A4 engine SULEV model NOTE Use new gaskets and self locking nuts when reassembling S E L F L O C K I N G NL 10 x 1 25 m m 33 N m 3 4 k g f m Replace S E L F L O C K I N G N U...

Page 255: ...10 Coolant Replacement 10 10 Water Outlet Replacement 10 12 Thermostat Replacement 10 13 Radiator and Fan Replacement 10 14 Fan Controls Component Location Index 10 15 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 1...

Page 256: ...Cooling System Component Location Index UPPER RADIATOR HOSE FAN MOTOR RADIATOR FAN T e s t p a g e 10 8 SHROUD R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 10 14 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 10 14 10 2...

Page 257: ...I D L E AIR C O N T R O L cont d 10 3...

Page 258: ...Cooling System Component Location Index cont d 10 4...

Page 259: ...he wires are OK replace the coolant temperature gauge If the coolant temperature gauge works test the coolant temperature sending unit 00 02 models Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at Al...

Page 260: ...sconnect ECM PCM connector C 31P 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and watch the coolant temperature gauge Does the temperature gauge needle move at all you may have to watch it for about 30 seconds Y...

Page 261: ...temperature Temperature 133 F 56 C 185 F 85 C 212 F 100 C Resistance Q 137 4 6 3 0 3 If the obtained readings are substantially different from the specifications above replace the sending unit Radiato...

Page 262: ...1 25 kgf cm2 14 18 psi 3 Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure 4 Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap 5 Check for engine oil in the coolant and or coolant in the engine o...

Page 263: ...the thermometer Check the temperature at which the thermostat first opens and at which it is fully open 3 Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fully open STANDARD THERMOSTAT Lift heig...

Page 264: ...der of removal 6 Clean the spilled engine coolant Coolant Replacement 1 Start the engine Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat then turn off the engine Make sure the engine and radia...

Page 265: ...malfunction or fail Honda All Season Antifreeze Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 antifreeze and 50 water Pre mixing is not required Engine Coolant Refill Capacity including the reservoir capacity of...

Page 266: ...water outlet A with a new O ring B M e t a l t y p e R e p l a c e t h e O r i n g w h e n e v e r t h e o u t l e t is r e m o v e d Plastic t y p e R e p l a c e t h e o u t l e t w i t h built in...

Page 267: ...Thermostat Replacement NOTE Use new O rings when reassembling PIN 6x 1 0 mm 12 Nm 1 2 kgfm 8 7 Ibfft 10 13...

Page 268: ...C K E T A N D C U S H I O N C O O L A N T R E S E R V O I R R A D I A T O R L O W E R C U S H I O N O R I N G Replace L O W E R R A D I A T O R H O S E F A N M O T O R C O N N E C T O R S F A N M O T...

Page 269: ...N S E R F A N R E L A Y T e s t p a g e u i R A D I A T O R F A N B E L A Y Test p a g e 2 2 5 i R A D I A T O R F A N S W I T C H Test p a g e 1 0 R A D I A T O R F A N A S S E M B L Y M o t o r T e...

Page 270: ...ator fan does not run at all Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting see page 10 19 Radiator fan does not run for engine cooling but it runs with A C on Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting Open s...

Page 271: ...E N S E R F A N RELAY WHT IGNITION SWITCH BAT IG2 IG2 HOT in ON II DRIVER S U N D E R D A S H FUSE RELAY BOX No 4 7 5A BLK YEL BLK YEL BLK YEL v AIR C O N D I T I O N I N G S Y S T E M BLU BLK GRN RAD...

Page 272: ...FUSE RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX No 41 100A o n a NO 42 50A No 57 20A WHT YEL No 4 7 5A IG2 HOT in ON II BLK YEL BLU BLK GRN RADIATOR FAN MOTOR DRADIATOR FAN SWITCH f...

Page 273: ...e t e r m i n a l s Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 4 NO Replace the under hood fuse relay box 4 Connect the No 1 and No 2 terminals of the radiator fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire...

Page 274: ...for an open in the wire between radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No 1 and body ground If the wire is OK check for a poor ground at G201 B 9 Reinstall the radiator fan relay 10 Disconnect the r...

Page 275: ...ing Short 1 Remove the radiator fan relay from the under hood fuse relay box and test it see page 22 52 Is the relay OK Y E S G o to step 2 NO Replace the radiator fan relay 2 Remove the radiator fan...

Page 276: ...tainer of water as shown 3 Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer Do not let the thermometer B touch the bottom of hot container 4 Measure the continuity between the A terminal C...

Page 277: ...ressure Relieving 11 115 Fuel Pressure Test 11 115 Fuel Pump Test 11 117 Fuel Line Inspection 11 118 Fuel Tube Quick Connect Fittings Precautions 11 120 Fuel Tube Quick Connect Fittings Removal 11 120...

Page 278: ...No Tool Number Description Qty A973X 041 XXXXX Vacuum Pump Gauge 0 30 in Hg 1 07JAZ 001000B Vacuum Pressure Gauge 0 4 in Hg 1 07SAZ 001000A Backprobe Set 2 07VAJ 0040100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachmen...

Page 279: ...tor DLC B located under the driver s side of the dashboard A 3 Turn the ignition switch ON II 4 Check the Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC and note it Then also check the freeze data Refer to the DTC Troub...

Page 280: ...a Troubleshooting Session required after any troubleshooting 1 Reset the ECM PCM as described above 2 Turn the ignition switch OFF 3 Disconnect the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester from the DLC N...

Page 281: ...e Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections How to substitute the ECM PCM for testing purposes Use this procedure if you need a known good ECM PCM to test a vehicle It allows you...

Page 282: ...rimary H02S Sensor 1 Slow Response see page 11 61 P0135 5 41 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor Primary H02S Sensor 1 Heater Circuit Malfunction see page 11 67 P0137 63 P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor...

Page 283: ...c Pressure BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage see page 11 77 P1121 7 P1121 Throttle Position TP Sensor Lower Than Expected see page 11 56 P1122 7 P1122 Throttle Position TP Sensor Higher Than Expected s...

Page 284: ...Fuel Tank System see page 11 149 P1457 90 P1457 Evaporative Emission EVAP Control System Leakage EVAP Canister System see page 11 152 P1486 6 87 P1486 Cooling System Malfunction see page 11 58 P1491...

Page 285: ...ignition spark Cold fast idle too low MIL works OK no DTCs set Check adjust the idle speed see page 11 110 Cold fast idle too high MIL works OK no DTCs set 1 Check adjust the idle speed see page 11 1...

Page 286: ...y a back up circuit independent of the system in order to permit minimal driving Self diagnosis When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor the ECM PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction I...

Page 287: ...engine stopped Nearly the same as atmospheric pressure At idle speed about 21 4 1 kPa 160 310 mmHg 6 3 12 2 inHg 0 7 1 3 V YES Engine Coolant Temperature ECT The ECT sensor converts coolant temperatu...

Page 288: ...amount of injected fuel This cycle keeps the air fuel ratio close to the stoichiometric ratio when in closed loop status 1 00 0 20 YES Long Term Fuel Trim Long term fuel trim is computed from short te...

Page 289: ...HT INSTRUMENT LIGHT 7 5A B No 6 ECU ECM PCM CRUISE CONTROL 15A B No 13 STARTER SIGNAL 7 5A B No 13 CLOCK BACKUP 7 5A c POWER SEAT 40A A No 6 LAF HEATER 20A c A in the under hood fuse relay box B in th...

Page 290: ...6 ECT VSV A4 4 V T S B12 C25 IAT A26 PSPSW 4 K S C3 IMOCD A25 A32 BKSW IMOEN A13 C10 VTM 4 2 ILU A28 C1 P02SHTC 5 6 MTRTW C24 C16 PH02S 5 AS S02SHTC BARO SENSOR Built into the ECM PCM A23 SH02S BARO S...

Page 291: ...S O L E N O I D V A L V E B S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E C 0 J f _0 A T C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E A 2 O O A T C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O...

Page 292: ...h fully w a r m e d up engine running duty controlled B L U W H T V S S O U T VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR O U T P U T SIGNAL Sends vehicle speed sensor signal Depending o n vehicle speed pulses 10 BRN SCS SE...

Page 293: ...s immobilizer signal 26 GRN PSPSW P S PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL Detects PSP switch signal At idle w i t h steering w h e e l in straight ahead position 0 V At idle w i t h steering w h e e l at full lock...

Page 294: ...n n i n g duty controlled 12 4 GRN YEL VTS VTEC SOLENOID VALVE Drives VTEC solenoid valve W i t h engine at l o w r p m 0 V W i t h engine at h i g h r p m battery voltage 13 YEL GRN ICM IGNITION CON...

Page 295: ...IDE Detects A F sensor sensor 1 signal 15 3 BLU P H 0 2 S AIR FUEL RATIO A F SENSOR SENSOR 1 SIDE Detects A F sensor sensor 1 signal 16 5 W H T P H 0 2 S PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR SENSOR 1 Det...

Page 296: ...T SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve A VALVE A I W i t h engine running in 2nd 3rd gears battery voltage W i t h engine running in 1st 4th gears about 0 V g 2 PNK ATPD3 AT GEAR POSITION SWITCH Detec...

Page 297: ...Vacuum Hose Routing 98 00 models F R O N T O F V E H I C L E cont d 11 21...

Page 298: ...Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions cont d Vacuum Hose Routing 01 02 models A T F R O N T O F V E H I C L E 11 22...

Page 299: ...L P R E S S U R E R E G U L A T O R F U E L P U M P F U E L T A N K A I R C L E A N E R R E S O N A T O R E X H A U S T G A S R E C I R C U L A T I O N E G R V A L V E and P O S I T I O N S E N S O R...

Page 300: ...nals the ECM PCM during charging The ECM PCM then controls the voltage generated at the alternator according to the electrical load determined by the ELD Electrical Load Detector and driving mode This...

Page 301: ...fuel system and set a Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC if the malfunction occurs during two consecutive trips Knock Sensor F23A1 F23A4 engine The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing for the oc...

Page 302: ...ated Oxygen sensor Secondary H02S The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic Converter TWO and sends signals to the ECM PCM which varies the...

Page 303: ...alternator is charging the ECM PCM controls current to the IAC valve to maintain the correct idle speed Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system Idle Air Control IAC Valv...

Page 304: ...when the vehicle is stopped the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5 000 rpm PGM FI Main Relay The PGM FI relay contains two separate relays One is energized whenever the ignition is on which su...

Page 305: ...re is below 167 F 75 C the ECM PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister Fuel Tank Pressure FTP Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into...

Page 306: ...MAIN R E L A Y V A R I O U S S E N S O R S BLK _ L Idle Control System Diagram The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the Idle Air Control IAC valve After the engine starts the IAC valve opens...

Page 307: ...the ideal EGR valve lift for varying operating conditions The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the ECM PCM The ECM PCM then compares it with the ideal li...

Page 308: ...resh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is above 167 F 75 C When...

Page 309: ...Circuit Diagram ECM PCM Circuit Diagram i t fc a To CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT W H T B L K J BLK JUNCTION C O N N E C T O R 3 MAP S E N S O R EGR VALVE POSITION S E N S O R 3 To page 11 34 cont d 11 33...

Page 310: ...page 11 33 a B L K Y E I a I I a G R N B L K B L K Y E L PRIMARY 5 H 0 2 S SENSOR 1 HHP VTEC 4 SOLENOID VALVE 4 VTEC P R E S S U R E SWITCH 4 JUNCTION C O N N E C T O R CESEh K S 3 3 T D C S E N S O R...

Page 311: ...V A L V E uTjx SHIFT S O L E N O I D V A L V E A 2 I SHIFT S O L E N O I D V A L V E B 2 I SHIFT S O L E N O I D V A L V E C 2 3 M A I N S H A F T SPEED SENSOR 3 C O U N T E R S H A F T S P E E D SEN...

Page 312: ...tB B L U 4 YEL BLK1 YEL BLK2 W 0P2SW Z j P BT4 BLU BLK W I O P 3 S W 2 J P B24 BLU WH i elMOCD 2 RED AlMOEN f Ul3 B L U 2 3 No 11NJECTOR J No 2 INJECTOR No 3 INJECTOR Z3 No 4 INJECTOR JUNCTION CONNECT...

Page 313: ...3 F23A4 engirt 6 00 02 models m T P 1 BRN3 VvV 1 AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR SENSOR 1 3 WHT3 r BLK YEL RED BLU RED BLU AIR FUEL RATIO S E N S O R RELAY 3 C204 r i n H YEL GRN2 BLK BLU W H T 5 PNK3 B L U 8 B...

Page 314: ...G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E E V A P C A N I S T E R P U R G E V A L V E n 1 C R U I S E C O N T R O L UNIT if IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR L I G H T To T A C H O M E T E R B L U...

Page 315: ...CONNECTOR B FUSE RELAY BOX BLK YEL GRN BLK2 GRN BLK2 YEL BLU CONNECTOR I GRN BLK2 Y E L B L U YEL BLK YEL a CONNECTOR K IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR M FUSES A No 9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT LIGHT 7 1A B...

Page 316: ...WHT BLK YEL WHT BLK1 C O N N E C T O R N W H T C O N N E C T O R E BLK YEL C From page 11 38 A DRIVERS U N D E R D A S H FUSE RELAY B O X r GRY BRN1 BRN BLK1 WHT GRN BLK DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R W...

Page 317: ...E R S U N D E R D A S H F U S E R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R C W H T C O N N E C T O R A W H T G R N C O N N E C T O R B W H T Y E L Y E L YEL GRN B L K Y E L G R N R E D B L K C O N N E C T O R...

Page 318: ...several times one or more readiness codes are not set to complete To set each code drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the following procedures Air Fuel Ratio A F Sensor Monitor Code N...

Page 319: ...imes Between each repetition close the throttle completely for 1 2 seconds If the engine is stopped during this part of the procedure repeat steps 3 4 and 5 6 Check for the readiness code with the sca...

Page 320: ...emperature between 20 95 F 7 3 5 C 1 Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector 2 Start the engine and hold it at 3 000 rpm with no load in Park or neutral until the radiator fan comes on 3 Let...

Page 321: ...E R A T U R E I A T S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p a g e 11 50 T H R O T T L E P O S I T I O N T P S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p a g e 11 54 C R A N K S H A F T P O S I T I...

Page 322: ...PGM FI System Component Location Index cont d 11 46...

Page 323: ...GRN WHT VCC1 YEL RED 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Wire side of female terminals Is there approx 5 V YES Repair open in the wire between the ECM PCM C19 and the...

Page 324: ...igher or 4 49 V or higher indicated Y E S G o to step 8 NO Replace the MAP sensor 8 Remove the jumper wire 9 Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No 1 and No 2 M A P S E N S O R 3...

Page 325: ...m is OK at this time B NO Replace the MAP sensor DTC P1129 MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected 1 Start the engine Hold the engine at 3 000 rpm with no load in Park or neutral until the radiator fan...

Page 326: ...en IAT sensor 2P connector terminal No 2 and body ground I A T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R 8 Check the temperature reading on the scan tool Be aware that if the engine is warm the reading will be...

Page 327: ...r wire E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 31P 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 IAT R E D Y E L S G 2 G R N B L K J U M P E R W I R E W i r e si de o f f e m a l e t e...

Page 328: ...the ECT with the scan tool Is 302 F 150 C or higher or H Limit in Honda mode of PGM Tester or 0 V indicated Y E S G o to step 3 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Check for poor connec...

Page 329: ...e ignition switch OFF 7 Connect ECM PCM connector terminals C18 and C26 with a jumper wire E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 31P 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 23 29 30 E C...

Page 330: ...inals No 1 and No 3 T P S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R S G 2 G R N B L K V C C 2 Y E L B L U W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there approx 5 V YES Go to step 8 NO Go to step 15 8 T...

Page 331: ...ctor terminal No 2 and body ground T P S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R 1 2 3 ED BLK T P S RE ED BLK W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity YES Substitute a known good...

Page 332: ...rmittent failure system is OK at this time B NO Replace the throttle body The TP sensor is not available separately DTC P1121 TP Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected 1 Turn the ignition switch ON II 2 Ch...

Page 333: ...N II 7 At the wire harness side measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No 1 and No 3 T P S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R 8 Measure voltage between ECM PCM connector terminals C18 a...

Page 334: ...e P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 Cylinder 1 2 3 or 4 Misfire Detected P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction P1519 idle Air Control Valve DTC P0128 P1486 can set occasionally when the hood is opened 1 Check t...

Page 335: ...Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Disconnect the Primary H02S Sensor 1 4P connector 7 Start the engine and let it idle 8 Check the Primary H02S Sensor 1 output voltage with the scan tool Does the voltag...

Page 336: ...M P E R W I R E SG2 GRN BLK P H 0 2 S WHT T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Check the Primary H02S Sensor 1 output voltage with the scan tool Is...

Page 337: ...he engine at 3 000 rpm with no load in Park or neutral until the radiator fan comes on 3 Test drive under following conditions 55 mph 89km n steady speed A T in D4 position M T in 5th gear Until readi...

Page 338: ...d the ECM PCM 4 Turn the ignition switch OFF 5 Disconnect the Secondary H02S Sensor 2 4P connector 6 Start the engine 7 Check the Secondary H02S Sensor 2 output voltage with the scan tool Does the vol...

Page 339: ...ep 4 4 Turn the ignition switch OFF 5 Disconnect the Secondary H02S Sensor 2 4P connector 6 Start the engine 7 Check the Secondary H02S Sensor 2 output voltage with the scan tool Does the voltage stay...

Page 340: ...2 4 P C O N N E C T O R J U M P E R W I R E S G 2 G R N B L K S H 0 2 S W H T R E D T e r m i n a l side o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Check the Secondary H02S Sens...

Page 341: ...C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S S E N S O R 2 4P C O N N E C T O R J U M P E R W I R E S G 2 G R N B L K S H 0 2 S W H T R E D T e r m i n a l side o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 8 Turn the ignition switch ON I...

Page 342: ...d under the under hood fuse relay box the Secondary H02S Sensor 2 and the ECM PCM DTC P0139 Secondary H02S Sensor 2 Slow Response F23A4 SULEV engine 1 Reset the PCM see page 11 4 2 Start the engine Ho...

Page 343: ...condary Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 4P connector 6 At the H02S side measure resistance between H02S 4P connector terminals No 3 and No 4 H02S 4P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals Is there 10 40 Q F23A4...

Page 344: ...P C O N N E C T O R IG1 B L K Y E L T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 14 Turn the ignition switch OFF 15 Reconnect the H02S 4P connector 16 Disconnect ECM PCM connector C 31P ECM...

Page 345: ...the pressure is too high Check the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel return line If the pressure is too low Check the fuel pump the fuel feed line the fuel filter and the fuel pressure regulator 2...

Page 346: ...23A1 F23A4 engine P1361 P1362 TDC sensor P1381 P1382 CYP sensor P1519 IAC valve 2 Test drive the vehicle to verify the symptom 3 Find the symptom in the chart below and do the related procedures and c...

Page 347: ...to spark plug fouling etc no misfire at this time 6 Determine which cylinder s had the misfire Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark plug was exchanged YES Replace the faulty spark pl...

Page 348: ...m a l e t e r m i n a l s is there continuity YES Repair short in the wire between the ECM PCM C3 and the knock sensor B N O G o to step 7 7 Connect knock sensor connector terminal No 1 to body ground...

Page 349: ...for the DTC s you retrieved P1361 or P1362 C K P T D C S E N S O R 4 P C O N N E C T O R T D C P T D C M T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s P0335 or P0336 C K P T D C S E N S O R 4...

Page 350: ...m i n a l s Is there 1 850 2 450 Q Y E S G o to step 9 NO Repair open in the faulty sensor wire s B 9 Check for continuity between the ECM PCM connector terminal s to body ground as indicated for the...

Page 351: ...W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Does the voltage pulse between 0 V and 5 V YES Substitute a known good ECM and recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the o...

Page 352: ...n the passenger s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK 5 Measure voltage between ECM PCM connector terminal B21 and body ground E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R B 25P 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16...

Page 353: ...Temporary DTC P1106 indicated YES Substitute a known good ECM PCM and recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the original ECM PCM NO Intermittent failure system is OK at thi...

Page 354: ...rt the engine Hold the engine at 3 000 rpm with no load in Park or neutral until the radiator fan comes on 3 Test drive under following conditions 55 mph 89 km h steady speed A T in D4 position M T in...

Page 355: ...s there 2 5 3 0 V Y E S G o to step 6 NO Go to step 10 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 Disconnect the A F Sensor 4P connector and ECM PCM connector C 31P 8 Connect ECM PCM connector terminals C14 and...

Page 356: ...CM PCM see page 11 4 2 Start the engine Hold the engine at 3 000 rpm with no load in Park or neutral until the radiator fan comes on 3 Check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool Is Temporary DTC P11...

Page 357: ...e YES Substitute a known good ECM PCM and recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the original ECM PCM N O G o t o step 5 5 Measure voltage between ECM PCM connector terminal...

Page 358: ...PCM B19 N O G o to step 13 13 Turn the ignition switch ON II 14 Measure voltage between ECM PCM connector terminals B16 and B20 E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R B 25P 19 10 20 L G 1 B R N B L K 11 12 21...

Page 359: ...nnector C 31P 4 Connect ECM PCM connector terminals C14 and C15 to body ground with a jumper wire E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 31P 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29...

Page 360: ...nector terminal No 3 E L D 3 P C O N N E C T O R 1 2 3 E L G R N R E D W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there approx 5 V Y E S R e p l a c e the ELD I N O G o t o step 8 8 Turn the ig...

Page 361: ...l e t e r m i n a l s Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 8 NO Repair open in the wire between the No 6 ECU PCM CRUISE CONTROL 15A fuse and the ELD B 8 Turn the ignition switch OFF 9 Connect EL...

Page 362: ...rt the engine and let it idle 15 While measuring voltage between ECM PCM connector terminals A30 and B20 turn the headlights on low E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R S 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 1...

Page 363: ...tem is OK at this time Check for poor connections or loose wires at the CKP TDC sensor and the ECM PCM 3 Check for poor connections or loose wires between the CKP TDC sensor and the ECM PCM Are the co...

Page 364: ...e between distributor 4P connector terminals No 3 and No 4 For the F23A5 engine measure resistance between the distributor 4P connector terminals No 2 and No 4 DISTRIBUTOR 4P CONNECTOR F23A1 F23A4 ENG...

Page 365: ...ire between the ECM PCM C29 C30 and the distributor 12 Check for continuity between body ground and ECM PCM connector terminal C29 E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 31P 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17...

Page 366: ...wn good ECM PCM and recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the original ECM PCM N O G o t o step 4 4 Turn the ignition switch OFF 5 Turn the ignition switch ON II 6 Wait 10...

Page 367: ...en the ECM PCM A21 and the DLC An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM PCM A18 and the gauge assembly N O I f the MIL is always off go to step 6 But if the MIL sometimes works normally first...

Page 368: ...FF then disconnect ECM PCM connector C 31P and check for continuity between body ground and ECM PCM connector terminals C19 and C28 individually E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 31P 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10...

Page 369: ...relay see page 11 112 If necessary repair or replace the relay 14 Reconnect the connectors to the sensors then reconnect ECM PCM connector C 31P 15 Turn the ignition switch ON II and measure voltage b...

Page 370: ...32 W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there about 5 V Y E S G o to step 17 NO Repair short in the wire between the DLC and the ECM PCM A10 B 17 Turn the ignition switch OFF disconne...

Page 371: ...L K 4 5 7 1 4 1 6 B W H T G R N T e r m i n a l s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there battery voltage YES Goto step 3 NO Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No 4 and body ground...

Page 372: ...a l side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity YES Substitute a known good ECM PCM and recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the original ECM PCM NO Repair...

Page 373: ...hose from the fuel pressure regulator D and EVAP canister purge valve Place a rag or shop towel over the hoses before disconnecting them 4 Disconnect the fuel hose E from the fuel rail F 5 Remove the...

Page 374: ...l and tighten the retainer nuts 15 Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail with new washers 16 Connect the vacuum hoses and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator and EVAP canister purge valve...

Page 375: ...H02S or A F Sensor A A 44 Nm 4 5 kgfm 33 Ibfft 2 Install the primary H02S or A F Sensor in the reverse order of removal Secondary H02S Replacement Special Tools Required 02 sensor wrench SNAP ON YA88...

Page 376: ...Idle Control System Component Location Index 11 100...

Page 377: ...f the idle speed is less than 650 rpm go to step 3 if it s 750 rpm or higher go to step 4 3 Disconnect the 3P connector from the IAC valve Does the engine speed increase or fluctuate YES Adjust the ba...

Page 378: ...Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 7 NO Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve and the PGM FI main relay 7 Turn the ignition switch OFF 8 Check for continuity between body ground and IA...

Page 379: ...l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity Y E S G o to step 13 NO Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve and the ECM PCM B23 B 13 Reconnect the IAC valve 3P connector 14 Turn the ignition switc...

Page 380: ...itch OFF 6 Reconnect the A C pressure switch connector 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Momentarily connect ECM PCM connector terminals A17 and B20 with a jumper wire several times E C M P C M C O N...

Page 381: ...he fuse box leave the upper cover on to prevent short circuits U N D E R H O O D F U S E R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R D 16P A C C R E D 1 3 4 7 8 11 12 14 16 J U M P E R W I R E W i r e s i d e o...

Page 382: ...decrease when the headlights and rear window defogger are turned on Y E S T h e ALT FR signal is OK B N O G o t o step 8 8 Turn the ignition switch OFF 9 Disconnect the negative cable from the batter...

Page 383: ...sure voltage between ECM PCM connector terminals A 2 4 and B20 with the ignition switch in the start position III E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R S 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 2...

Page 384: ...s A26 and B20 Is there battery voltage Y E S T h e PSP switch signal is OK B N O G o t o step 11 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector 8 Turn the ignition switch ON I...

Page 385: ...M I Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1 Check the brake lights Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake pedal YES Inspect the brake pedal position switch see page 19...

Page 386: ...it idle 4 Check the idle speed with no load conditions headlights blower fan rear defogger radiator fan and air conditioner off Idle speed should be M T 700 5 0 rpm A T 700 50 rpm in Park or neutral...

Page 387: ...Fuel Supply System Component Location Index 11 111...

Page 388: ...5 N O G o t o step 4 4 Check for a blown ACG S 15A fuse in the under hood fuse relay box Is the fuse blown YES Repair the short in the wire between the PGM FI main relay and the ACG S 15A fuse B NO Re...

Page 389: ...nector terminal No 1 and ECM PCM connector terminal A15 P G M F I M A I N R E L A Y 7 P C O N N E C T O R F L R G R N Y E L E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R A 32P 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20...

Page 390: ...onnector terminal No 1 Then check for continuity between the PGM FI main relay 7P connector terminals No 5 and No 4 NOTE Use the terminal numbers shown Ignore the terminal numbers molded into the rela...

Page 391: ...B 5 Place a rag or shop towel B over the fuel pulsation damper 6 Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper one complete turn NOTE Replace all washers whenever the fuel pulsation damper is loosened or re...

Page 392: ...p 9 10 Reconnect the vacuum hose remove the pressure gauge and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper with a new washer Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to 22 N m 2 2kgf m 16 Ibfft NOTE Disassemble and...

Page 393: ...relay 7P connector terminals No 4 and No 5 with a jumper wire P G M F I M A I N R E L A Y 7P C O N N E C T O R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F U E L P U M P B L K Y E L IG1 R E D W H T J U M P E R W I R E 5 Turn the...

Page 394: ...Fuel Supply System Fuel Line Inspection Check the fuel system lines hoses and fuel filter for damage leaks or deterioration Replace any damaged parts 11 118...

Page 395: ...ck all hose clamps and retighten them if necessary A Do not disconnect the hose from the line at these points E M I S S I O N E V A P C A N I S T E R P U R G E V A L V E C l a m p in t h e middle 11 1...

Page 396: ...nnected but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line Replace the retainer when replacing the fuel pump replacing the fuel filter replacing the fuel feed...

Page 397: ...from the line Replace the retainer when replacing the fuel pump replacing the fuel filter replacing the fuel feed line replacing the fuel return line it has been removed from the line it is damaged Fu...

Page 398: ...l both retainer pawls lock with a clicking sound NOTE If it is hard to connect put a small amount of new engine oil on the line end Connection with new retainer C Reconnection to existing retainer 5 M...

Page 399: ...leakage Fuel Filter Replacement After making sure that the fuel pump and the fuel pressure regulator are OK replace the fuel filter whenever fuel pressure drops below the specified value 320 370 kPa...

Page 400: ...and the wire harness E 9 When connecting the fuel pump make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter H is firmly connected to the fuel pump I 10 Install the parts in the reverse order of...

Page 401: ...uts slightly then raise the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported Remove the rear wheels 6 Release the parking brake 7 Remove the catalytic converter see page 9 5 8 Remove the fuel line cover...

Page 402: ...go to step 14 If it has rear disc brakes remove the clip A and parking brake cable B two caliper bolts C caliper body D and brake hose bracket E C 55 N m 5 6 k g f m 41 Ibfft B 13 Hook the caliper bod...

Page 403: ...Installation 1 Install the fuel tank straps A and tighten the bolts B Install the lines to the fuel line holder C 2 Place the jack or support under the rear suspension sub frame Install the rear suspe...

Page 404: ...B L U BLK 1 2 3 J 4 5 7 Turn the ignition switch OFF 8 Connect fuel pump 5P connector terminals No 1 and No 2 with a jumper wire then turn the ignition switch ON II F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O...

Page 405: ...ositions If you do not get the following readings replace the fuel gauge sending unit A Float Position E 1 2 F Resistance Q 105 107 29 5 35 5 3 5 9 Install the parts in the reverse order of removal wi...

Page 406: ...ndicator light should come on within 4 minutes If the light comes on within 4 minutes go to step 9 If the light does not come on within 4 minutes go to step 5 5 Remove the spare tire lid 6 Remove the...

Page 407: ...tion Index T H R O T T L E B O D Y Test p a g e 11 132 R e m o v a l I n s t a l l a t i o n p a g e 11 135 D i s a s s e m b l y R e a s s e m b l y p a g e 11 136 T H R O T T L E C A B L E A d j u s...

Page 408: ...ctor 4 Turn the ignition switch ON II 5 Check the throttle position with the scan tool There should be approx 10 when the throttle is fully closed and approx 90 when the throttle is fully opened If th...

Page 409: ...11...

Page 410: ...3 8 1 2 in loosen the locknut B turn the adjusting nut C until the deflection is as specified then retighten the locknut 4 With the cable properly adjusted check the throttle valve to be sure it opens...

Page 411: ...Body Removal Installation NOTE Do not adjust the throttle stop screw After reassembly adjust the cruise control cable see page 4 54 and the throttle cable see page 11 134 The TP sensor is not removabl...

Page 412: ...r System Throttle Body Disassembly Reassembly 2 1 N m 0 21 k g f m 1 5 I b f f t MAP S E N S O R O R I N G Replace O R I N G IDLE A D J U S T I N G S C R E W T H R O T T L E P O S I T I O N S E N S O...

Page 413: ...ive at 4 0 5 5 mph 64 88 km h for approx 2 minutes Then decelerate for at least 3 seconds with the throttle completely closed Then reduce the vehicle speed to 35 mph 56 km h and try to hold it until t...

Page 414: ...OK at this time B NO Clean the intake manifold EGR port with carburetor cleaner Clean the passage inside the EGR valve with carburetor cleaner or replace the EGR valve DTC P1491 EGR Valve Insufficient...

Page 415: ...EGR valve and the ECM PCM C18 C28 B NO Substitute a known good ECM PCM and recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the original ECM PCM 13 Turn the ignition switch OFF 14 At...

Page 416: ...tinuity between ECM PCM connector terminal C6 and body ground E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R C 3 1 P E G R L W H T B L K 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Wire side...

Page 417: ...e and the ECM PCM B7 M 30 Check for continuity between ECM PCM connector terminal B7 and body ground E C M P C M C O N N E C T O R B 25P E E G R PNK 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2...

Page 418: ...No 3 E G R V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R S G 2 G R N B L K 2 V C C 2 Y E L B L U W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there approx 5 V YES Replace the EGR v a l v e N O G o t o step...

Page 419: ...tions 2 At idle make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake manifold is lightly pinched A with your fingers or pliers If there is no clicking...

Page 420: ...Evaporative Emission Control System Component Location Index 11 144...

Page 421: ...EVAP two way valve end 7 Connect a vacuum pump to the open end of that hose A 9 7 3 X 0 4 1 X X X X X 8 Turn the ignition switch ON II 9 Monitor FTP sensor voltage with the Honda PGM Tester or measure...

Page 422: ...5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 P T A N K LT G R N X W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there approx 2 5 V YES Intermittent failure system is OK at...

Page 423: ...recheck see page 11 5 If the symptom indication goes away replace the original ECM PCM DTC P0453 FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 1 Check the vacuum lines of the FTP sensor for misrouting leakage brea...

Page 424: ...minals No 2 and No 3 F T P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R P T A N K LT G R N S G 2 G R N B L K W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there approx 5 V YES Replace the FTP sensor N O G...

Page 425: ...esh fuel and less than a full tank of fuel If possible to assist in leak detection add one gallon of fresh fuel to the tank as long as it will not fill the tank just before starting these procedures F...

Page 426: ...N N E C T O R 1 2 2WBS BLU W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity Y E S G o to step 10 NO Repair open in wire between the EVAP bypass solenoid valve and ECM PCM A3 B 10...

Page 427: ...way valve FTP sensor or O rings Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test 14 Perform the fuel tank vapor control valve test see page 11 160 Is the fuel tank vapor control valve normal Y E S G o to step 15 NO...

Page 428: ...troubleshooting procedures carefully to ensure the integrity of the system and to comfirm the cause of the problem or code NOTE Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create greater pressure va...

Page 429: ...o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity Y E S G o to step 8 NO Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister purge valve and ECM PCM A6 B 8 Turn the ignition switch ON II 9 Measure...

Page 430: ...terminal No 2 and body ground E V A P B Y P A S S S O L E N O I D V A L V E 2P C O N N E C T O R 1 2 2WBS BLU W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity Y E S G o to step 1...

Page 431: ...e t e r m i n a l s 20 Turn the ignition switch ON II 21 Apply vacuum to the hose Does the valve hold vacuum Y E S T h e EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK Go to step 27 N O G o t o step 22 22 Turn...

Page 432: ...vent shut valve A and O ring B fl NO Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister vent shut valve and No 6 ECU ECM PCM CRUISE CONTROL 15A fuse B Canister System Leak Test 27 Turn the ignition swi...

Page 433: ...line and connections N O G o t o step 34 34 Turn the ignition switch OFF 35 Disconnect the quick connect fitting A from the EVAP canister and cap the canister port B 36 Turn the ignition switch ON II...

Page 434: ...t the EVAP canister purge valve line and connections for vacuum leaks If they are OK do the EVAP two way valve test and fuel tank vapor control valve test see page 11 160 NO Replace the EVAP canister...

Page 435: ...3 in Hg If the pressure momentarily stabilizes valve opens above 1 0 kPa 8 mmHg 0 3in Hg the valve is OK If the pressure stabilizes below 1 0 kPa 8 mmHg 0 3 in Hg install a new valve and retest 3 Appl...

Page 436: ...lation tube A If the vacuum holds replace the fuel tank vapor control valve see page 11 162 If the vacuum does not hold the float is OK Go to step 1 of the valve test Valve Test 1 Make sure the fuel t...

Page 437: ...ecirculation hose B NOTE At either location tiny droplets of fuel are normal If fuel runs out of the hoses at either location replace the fuel tank vapor control valve If fuel does not run out of the...

Page 438: ...Control Valve Replacement 1 Remove the fuel tank see page 11 125 2 Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve A from the fuel tank B 3 Replace the base gasket C 4 Install the fuel tank vapor control val...

Page 439: ...3 Clutch Pedal and Clutch Switch Adjustment 12 4 Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement 12 5 Slave Cylinder Replacement 12 6 Clutch Replacement 12 7 Manual Transmission 13 1 M T Differential 13 53 Automat...

Page 440: ...l Tools Ref No Tool Number Description Qty C D 07JAF PM7011A Clutch Alignment Disc 1 07LAB PV00100 or 07924 PD20003 Ring Gear Holder 1 C D 07LAF PT00110 Clutch Alignment Shaft 1 07936 3710100 Remover...

Page 441: ...Component Location Index C L U T C H P E D A L A d j u s t m e n t p a g e 12 4 R E L E A S E B E A R I N G R e p l a c e m e n t s t e p 1 o n p a g e 12 11 12 3...

Page 442: ...t D 7 N m 0 7 kgfm 5 Ibf 5 Turn the clutch switch B in an additional 3 4 to 1 turn 6 Tighten locknut A 7 Loosen locknut H and the clutch interlock switch I 8 Press the clutch pedal to the floor 9 Rele...

Page 443: ...utch master cylinder reservoir 4 Remove the power relay C 5 Pry out the lock pin A and pull the pedal pin B out of the yoke Remove the nuts C C Remove the retaining clip A Disconnect the clutch line B...

Page 444: ...ng Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease P N 08798 9002 to the push rod of the slave cylinder Tighten the slave cylinder mounting bolts to 23 N m 2 3 kgf m 17 Ibf ft 5 Bleed the clutch hydraulic system Ti...

Page 445: ...r height using the special tools and a feeler gauge A If the height is more than the service limit replace the pressure plate Standard New 0 6 m m 0 02 in max Service Limit 0 8 m m 0 03 in 07936 37101...

Page 446: ...g of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked replace it 10 Measure the clutch disc thickness If the thickness is less than the service limit repla...

Page 447: ...the flywheel and recheck the runout Standard New 0 05 mm 0 002 in max Service Limit 0 15 mm 0 006 in B A Flywheel Removal 1 Install the special tool 0 7 L A B P V 0 0 1 0 0 or 07924 PD20003 2 Remove...

Page 448: ...f the clutch disc B then install the clutch disc using the special tools 3 Install the pressure plate A and the mounting bolts B finger tight B 4 Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern Tigh...

Page 449: ...the release bearing C and the release bearing guide D in the shaded areas B D 0 4 1 0 g 0 0 1 0 0 4 oz 0 4 1 0 g 0 0 1 0 0 4 oz 1 0 1 6 g 0 0 4 0 0 6 oz 5 With the release fork slid between the releas...

Page 450: ......

Page 451: ...sembly 13 34 Countershaft Inspection 13 35 Countershaft Reassembly 13 36 Shift Forks Clearance Inspection 13 39 Shift Forks Disassembly Reassembly 13 40 Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection and Reassembl...

Page 452: ...t 1 07JAD PH80400 Pilot 28 x 30 mm 1 07LAD PW50601 Bearing Attachment 1 07736 A01000B Adjustable Bearing Puller 25 40 mm 1 07746 0010300 Attachment 42 x 47 mm 1 07746 0010400 Attachment 52 x 55 mm 1 0...

Page 453: ...m 29 Ibfft 4 Reinstall the drain plug D with a new washer F and refill the transmission fluid to the proper level Oil Capacity 1 9 fi 2 0 US qt 1 7 Imp qt at fluid change 2 0 0 2 1 US q t 1 8 Imp qt a...

Page 454: ...nt commercially available NOTE Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces 1 Disconnect the negative cable first then the positive cable from the battery Remove the battery 2 Remove the intak...

Page 455: ...8 Remove the transmission ground cable B and starter cable clamp C 9 First remove the cable bracket A then disconnect the cables B from the top of the transmission housing Carefully remove both cables...

Page 456: ...racket brace 13 Remove the front engine mount bracket 3 mounting bolts 14 Raise vehicle and make sure it is securely supported 15 Drain transmission fluid with a shop towel covering the front and rear...

Page 457: ...orks D 19 Pull the driveshafts out of the intermediate shaft and differential see page 16 3 Coat all the precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil grease Tie bags over the driveshaft ends 20 R...

Page 458: ...24 Make reference marks A on the rear beam B and front beam C then remove the front beam 25 Lift and support the engine transmission assembly with an engine hanger P N AAR T 1256 available through the...

Page 459: ...the transmission mount stud bolt C on the transmission housing 29 Remove the intake manifold bracket 30 Remove the two rear engine mount bracket A mounting bolts B 31 Remove the rear side transmissio...

Page 460: ...bearing C from the transmission D D Transmission Installation 1 Check that the dowel pins are installed in the clutch housing 2 Install the slave cylinder bracket on the transmission assembly 8 x 1 25...

Page 461: ...nting bolts C 9 Install the transmission mount stud bolt A on the transmission housing A 10 Raise the transmission install the transmission mount B and transmission mount bracket C Torque mounting bol...

Page 462: ...he power steering cooler line A in the line 12 Install the front beam A in its original position by 14 Install both radius rods A with new mounting aligning the marks B you made in the removal bolts o...

Page 463: ...ner 10 x 1 25 m m 44 N m 4 5 k g f m 3 3 Ibfft 16 Install the intake manifold bracket 8 x 1 25 m m 2 2 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibfft 17 Install the intermediate shaft see page 16 26 10 x 1 25 m m 39 N m 4...

Page 464: ...m m 6 4 N m 6 5 k g f m 47 Ibf ft 20 Install the ball joints C onto the lower arms D and install the castle nuts E and cotter pins F 21 Install the splash shield 22 Install the washer A and the front...

Page 465: ...ll the cable bracket A and cables B Turn the shift lever boot C so the hole is facing down 8x 1 25 m m 27 N m 2 8 k g f m 20 I b f f t G R E A S E P N 0 8 7 9 8 9 0 0 2 27 Install the transmission gro...

Page 466: ...47 Ibfft 30 Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease P N 08798 9002 to the end of the slave cylinder rod Install the slave cylinder A and clutch line clamp B Take care not to bend the clutch line 6 x 1 0 m m...

Page 467: ...ery 36 Refill the transmission fluid see page 13 3 37 Test drive the vehicle 38 Check the clutch operation 39 Check the transmission for noise and smooth operation 40 Check the front wheel alignment s...

Page 468: ...Manual Transmission Shift Arm Replacement Exploded View SELECT LEVER 13 18...

Page 469: ...1 0 m m 12 N m 1 2 kgf m 9 Ibf ft 8 x 1 4 m m 2 Remove the spring pin A then remove the select lever B select arm C and springs D A 5 x 22 m m G R E A S E P N 08798 9002 3 Remove the reverse lock cam...

Page 470: ...grease all sliding parts Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease P N 08798 9002 Apply liquid gasket P N 08718 0001 to the interlock bolt threads before reassembly Turn the shift lever boot so the hole is...

Page 471: ...E M A G N E T R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R S H A F T R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R O I L S E A L B A L L B E A R I N G S P R I N G W A S H E R W A S H E R R E V E R S E S H I F T F O R K S H I F T F O R...

Page 472: ...W W A S H E R Replace S P R I N G L 2 6 m m 1 02 in S T E E L B A L L O D 5 1 6 i n F R O N T T R A N S M I S S I O N H A N G E R 3 2 m m S E A L I N G B O L T W A S H E R Replace R E V E R S E I D L...

Page 473: ...he setting screws B then remove the washers C springs D and steel balls E 4 Remove the back up light switch A 5 Remove the bolts and transmission hangers B in a crisscross pattern in several steps 6 R...

Page 474: ...ul not to lose the steel ball IB A 11 Remove the reverse idler gear shaft A and the reverse idler gear B 12 Tape the mainshaft splines then remove the mainshaft assembly A and countershaft assembly B...

Page 475: ...d replace the reverse shift fork with a new one If the widths of the grooves are within the standard replace the 5th reverse shift piece with a new one Standard 7 05 7 25 mm 0 278 0 285 in 7 4 7 7 mm...

Page 476: ...thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service limit replace 3rd gear with a new one If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service limit replace the 3rd 4th synchro hub with a new one Standard S...

Page 477: ...t go to step 8 Standard 0 06 0 21 mm 0 002 0 008 in Service Limit 0 3 mm 0 01 in t i 8 Measure distance on the spacer collar If distance is less than the service limit replace the spacer collar with a...

Page 478: ...D Be sure the bearing separator is under the tapered cone ring D C 2 Support 5th gear A on steel blocks and press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub B Use of a jaw type puller can cause damage t...

Page 479: ...in B Needle bearing surface 37 984 38 000 m m 1 4954 1 4961 in C Ball bearing surface 27 977 27 990 m m 1 1015 1 1020 in Service Limit A 27 940 m m 1 1000 in B 37 930 m m 1 4933 in C 27 940 m m 1 100...

Page 480: ...Manual Transmission Mainshaft Reassembly Exploded View Check f o r w e a r a n d o p e r a t i o n 13 30...

Page 481: ...blocks then install the 3rd 4th synchro hub B using the special tools and a press C Note the direction of installation for the 3rd 4th synchro hub After installing check the operation of the 3rd 4th s...

Page 482: ...easure the thickness of the thrust washer If the thickness is less than the standard replace the thrust washer with a new one If the thickness is within the standard go to step 3 Standard 1 95 1 97 mm...

Page 483: ...e spacer If the thickness is less than the standard replace the spacer with a new one If the thickness is within the standard go to step 6 Measure the thickness of the 2nd gear If the thickness of 2nd...

Page 484: ...to raise the locknut tab B from the groove in the countershaft 3 Remove the locknut A and the spring washer B B A 4 Support 4th gear A on steel blocks B then use a press C and an attachment D to press...

Page 485: ...C A B C 38 000 38 015 mm 1 4961 1 4967 in 39 984 40 000 mm 1 5742 1 5748 in 24 987 25 000 mm 0 9837 0 9843 in 37 950 mm 1 4941 in 39 930 mm 1 5720 in 24 940 mm 0 9819 in 2 Inspect the runout by suppo...

Page 486: ...O U N T E R S H A F T L O C K N U T Replace 127 0 127 N m 13 0 1 3 k g f m 9 4 0 9 4 Ibfft S P R I N G W A S H E R B A L L B E A R I N G C h e c k f o r w e a r a n d o p e r a t i o n N E E D L E B E...

Page 487: ...onto the countershaft C Assemble the friction damper D and 1st gear E together and install them on the countershaft then install the synchro ring F and the synchro spring G 3 Install the 1st 2nd sync...

Page 488: ...4th gear and 5th gear 9 Install the needle bearing A and the ball bearing B using the special tool and a press C 07947 6890100 10 Install the spring washer A and loosely install the new locknut B 11 S...

Page 489: ...the shift fork with a new one If the thickness of the shift fork finger is within the standard replace the synchro sleeve with a new one Standard 6 2 6 4 mm 0 24 0 25 in 3 Measure the clearance betwee...

Page 490: ...sassembly Reassembly Prior to reassembling clean all the parts in solvent dry them and apply lubricant to any contact parts 1 S T 2 N D S H I F T F O R K 5 T H R E V E R S E S H I F T P I E C E 5 x 22...

Page 491: ...he three sets of deeper grooves D in the synchro hub Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the 1st 2nd synchro hub slots E because it will damage the spring ring NOTE If replaceme...

Page 492: ...tween the synchro ring A and gear B all the way around Hold the synchro ring against the gear evenly while measuring the clearance If the clearance is less than the service limit replace the synchro r...

Page 493: ...e the retaining plate A from the clutch housing B 2 Remove the needle bearing A using the special tool then remove the oil guide plate B 3 Position the oil guide plate A and new needle bearing B in th...

Page 494: ...lacement Special Tools Required Adjustable bearing puller 25 40 mm 07736 A01000B Driver 07749 0010000 Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746 0010300 Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746 0010500 1 Remove the differential...

Page 495: ...holder 07GAJ PG20110 1 Remove the 78 m m shim A and oil guide plate B from the transmission housing C A t r C Install the 3rd 4th synchro hub A the spacer collar B the 5th synchro hub C the spacer D a...

Page 496: ...0 0543 in H 23948 P16 000 1 41 mm 0 0555 in I 23949 P16 000 1 44 mm 0 0567 in J 23950 P16 000 1 47 mm 0 0579 in K 23951 P16 000 1 50 mm 0 0591 in L 23952 P16 000 1 53 mm 0 0602 in M 23953 P16 000 1 56...

Page 497: ...se sealing agent between the housings 12 Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer 13 Slide the special tool A over the mainshaft B B 0 7 G A J P G 2 0 1 3 0 14 Attach the special tool to the mainshaft...

Page 498: ...uge stops moving this may damage the transmission 19 If the reading is within the standard the clearance is correct If the reading is not within the standard recheck the shim thickness Standard 0 10 0...

Page 499: ...ot of the reverse shift fork Make sure the steel ball C is in the proper position 6 x 1 0 mm 15 N m A 1 5 kgfm 11 Ibfft 6 Install the oil gutter plate in the transmission housing 7 Select the proper s...

Page 500: ...the transmission with oil 9 Install the 14x20 mm dowel pins 10 Set the tapered cone ring A as shown Place the transmission housing over the clutch housing being careful to line up the shafts 11 Lower...

Page 501: ...25 mm bolts 47 N m 4 8 kgfm 35 Ibfft 8 x 50 m m bolts Other 8 x 40 m m bolts 15 install the 5 16 in steel balls A 26 mm 1 02 in length springs B washers C and setting screws D 4 5 k g f m 33 Ibfft 16...

Page 502: ...eplacement R e m o v e t h e shift c a b l e f r o m t h e shift l e v e r bracket F L O A T I N G R U B B E R D A M P E R I n s p e c t f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e R o t a t e t h e shift c a b l...

Page 503: ...M T Differential Component Location Index F I N A L D R I V E N G E A R C A R R I E R B E A R I N G R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 13 54 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 13 55 13 53...

Page 504: ...0 05 0 15 mm 0 002 0 006 in Final Driven Gear Carrier Replacement 1 Remove the bolts left hand threads in a crisscross pattern in several steps then remove the final driven gear from the differential...

Page 505: ...stall the new bearings A with the special tool and a press Press each bearing on until it bottoms There should be no clearance between the bearings and the carrier 4 Inspect the bearing preload see pa...

Page 506: ...the new oil seal A in the transmission housing B with the special tools 07GAD PG40100 0 7 J A D P H 8 0 4 0 0 5 Install the new oil seal A in the clutch housing B with the special tools 07749 0010000...

Page 507: ...he transmission housing C Do not reuse the thrust shim If you replaced the carrier bearing on the transmission housing side of the carrier discard the outer race 07749 0010000 07746 0010400 If you rep...

Page 508: ...N m 14 Ibf in 26 k g f c m 12 23 07HAJ PK40201 If the carrier bearing preload is not within the standard select a thrust shim that will provide the correct preload Compare the bearing preload you got...

Page 509: ...1 PX5 000 2 20 mm 0 0866 in L 41392 PX5 000 2 23 mm 0 0878 in M 41393 PX5 000 2 26 mm 0 0890 in N 41394 PX5 000 2 29 mm 0 0902 in 0 41395 PX5 000 2 32 mm 0 0913 in P 41396 PX5 000 2 35 mm 0 0925 in Q...

Page 510: ......

Page 511: ...witch Test 14 147 Shift Lock Solenoid Test 14 147 Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 14 148 Park Pin Switch Test 14 148 Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gears Removal 14 149 Park Lever Stop Ins...

Page 512: ...ng Compressor Attachment 2 07MAJ PY4011A A T Pressure Hose 2 210 mm 4 07MAJ PY40120 A T Pressure Hose Adapter 4 07SAZ 001000A Backprobe Set 2 07ZAE PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1 07406 0020400...

Page 513: ...type 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and observe the DTC on the screen 3 Record all fuel and emission DTCs A T DTCs and freeze data 4 If there is a fuel and emissions DTC first check the fuel and emi...

Page 514: ...DTC Troubleshooting Index S h o r t blink once OFF S e e DTC1 OFF S e e DTC2 Long blink S h o r t blinks five times OFF S e e DTC15 If the S indicator or the MIL has been reported on or if a driveabi...

Page 515: ...of the center console to expose the PCM 2 Inspect the circuit on the PCM according to the DTC troubleshooting with the special tools and a digital 3 Connect the backprobe adapters A to the stacking pa...

Page 516: ...ve the BACK UP fuse 7 5 A A from the passenger s under dash fuse relay box B for 10 seconds How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting 1 Turn the igniti...

Page 517: ...nge switch short to ground see page 14 66 P1706 6 OFF ON Transmission range switch open see page 14 69 P1738 25 OFF OFF 2nd clutch pressure switch see page 14 84 P1739 26 OFF OFF 3rd clutch pressure s...

Page 518: ...turn the ignition switch ON II the Bindicator comes on and stays on or never comes on at all A problem in the B indicator circuit Check the S indicator circuit see page 14 93 Shift lever cannot be mo...

Page 519: ...differential assembly replace the ATF strainer thoroughly clean the transmission and flush the torque converter cooler and lines Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when replacing t...

Page 520: ...the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or aluminum inspect the ATF pump If the ATF pump is OK and no cause for the contamination is found replace the torque converter Inspect the reverse...

Page 521: ...tainer for wear and damage Inspect the clutch end plate to top disc clearance If the clearance is out of tolerance inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage If the discs and plates are w...

Page 522: ...anual Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections If necessary flush ATF cooler lines Check ATF cooling system for restriction Vehicle moves in M position 1 Excessive...

Page 523: ...d plates for wear and damage If the discs and plates are worn or damaged replace them as a set If they are OK adjust the clutch end plate clearance Late shift from HI position to El position 1 Shift s...

Page 524: ...hock or flares on all upshifts and downshifts 1 A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B defective 2 CPC valve A defective 3 CPC valve B defective 4 Foreign material in separator plate orif...

Page 525: ...r loose connectors Inspect the O rings and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or aluminum inspect the...

Page 526: ...ut of adjustment 2 Joint in shift cable and transmission or body worn 3 Park mechanism defective Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the transmission control shaft Check the park pawl...

Page 527: ...ock up clutch piston defective 6 Torque converter check valve defective 7 Lock up shift valve defective 8 Lock up control valve defective Check the B indicator indication and check for loose connector...

Page 528: ...and the accumulator body They are bolted to the torque converter housing The main valve body contains the manual valve the modulator valve the shift valve C the shift valve D the shift valve E the ser...

Page 529: ...es in 3rd and 4th gears B DRIVE 1st through 3rd For rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving up hill and down hill driving starts off in 1st shifts automatically to 2nd then 3rd depend...

Page 530: ...ondary shaft The 1st clutch is joined back to back to the 2nd clutch The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft 2nd Clutch The 2nd clutch engages dis...

Page 531: ...00 02 m o d e l s LUBRICATION PITOT PIPE 00 02 m o d e l s M A I N S H A F T R E V E R S E S E L E C T O R PITOT PIPE 00 02 m o d e l s R E V E R S E S E L E C T O R HUB C O U N T E R S H A F T C O U...

Page 532: ...he reverse gear is engaged disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch The idler gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft Gears on the countershaft The final drive gear is...

Page 533: ...tershaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler gear but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches Power is not transmitted to the countershaft The countershaft 4th gear is engaged with the...

Page 534: ...aft 1st gear with the secondary shaft The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the counter...

Page 535: ...h the secondary shaft The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear a...

Page 536: ...o the 3rd clutch then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear with the mainshaft The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft Power is transmitted to the final dr...

Page 537: ...ard range E 2 and CD position Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the mainshaft The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft...

Page 538: ...th clutch then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the mainshaft The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse Idler gear The rotation direction of...

Page 539: ...Coolant Temperature Sensor Signal MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT DRIVER S D4 D3 Doj Indicator Self Diagnosis Signal PGM FI Control System A T Control System Shift Control Lock up Control Self Diagnosis Functi...

Page 540: ...DRIVER S SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE PCM PARK PIN SWITCH COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVES A...

Page 541: ...s in 3rd ON OFF ON B Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF m 2nd ON ON OFF m 1st OFF ON ON m Shifting from E and O f f i position OFF ON ON Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF...

Page 542: ...S D E T E C T E D P C M o o c E a C o u n t e r s h a f t S p e e d S e n s o r Throttle Position S e n s o r Driving R e s i s t a n c e E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r C...

Page 543: ...the shift up speed from 3rd to 4th gear and from 2nd to 3rd when the throttle is closed becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas This in...

Page 544: ...M 9LG1 LG2 1 GAUGE ASSEMBLY J VB SOL VSS OUT A T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR b b k b SA LS A LSB v LS B SH A NMSG NC NCSG ILU A T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A A T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLEN...

Page 545: ...Voltage A5 BLU GRN CRS Downshift signal input from cruise control unit When cruise control is used Pulsing signal A9 BLU WHT VSSOUT Vehicle speed signal detected from countershaft speed sensor Dependi...

Page 546: ...gative electrode B9 YEL BLK IGP2 Power supply circuit from main relay With ignition switch ON II Battery voltage With ignition switch OFF 0 V B10 BLK PG2 Ground G101 B14 BLU BLK OP2SW A T 2nd clutch p...

Page 547: ...wing positions C D position B and B positions in 1st and 3rd gear 0 V in following positions U D position S and B positions in 2nd gear B position in 4th gear E E and E positions D4 Not used D5 BLK YE...

Page 548: ...tage D9 YEL ATPD4 Transmission range switch H position input In B position 0 V In other than E position Battery voltage D10 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed Pulsing si...

Page 549: ...valve body to the manual valve directing pressure to each of the clutches The shift solenoid valves B and C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter housing The shift solenoid valve A and t...

Page 550: ...up control valve the cooler check valve and the ATF pump gears The primary function of the main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydrau...

Page 551: ...verter also changes This operation is continued maintaining the line pressure NOTE When used left or right indicates direction on the illustration below From A T F PUMP To T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E...

Page 552: ...in valve body It contains the servo valve the shift valve A the shift valve B the CPC valves A and B and the 3rd and 4th accumulators Accumulator Body The accumulator body is on the torque converter h...

Page 553: ...re from the CPC pressure mode The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve This movement switches the port of the CPC and line pressure Line pressure is th...

Page 554: ...side Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF and the shift valve C remains in the left side Line pressure 1 passes through the manual valve and stops at the shift valve D Line pressure 1 also flows to th...

Page 555: ...t valve A is moved to the right side The A T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A regulates LS A pressure 56 and applies it to the CPC valve A Line pressure 1 becomes line pressure 4 at the manual...

Page 556: ...shift valve A then shift valve A is moved to the left side This movement switches the port of line pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode...

Page 557: ...pressure and CPC pressure The PCM also controls the A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves The A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and B L...

Page 558: ...he 1st clutch pressure circuit Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF and SH C pressure SO is applied to the right side of it Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pres...

Page 559: ...right side of shift valve B Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure Line pressure 4 becomes CPC A pressure 4A at the CPC valve A The CPC A pre...

Page 560: ...B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON and SH C pressure SC in the right side of shift valve C is released Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to...

Page 561: ...of shift valve A Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure Line pressure 4 becomes CPC B pressure 4B at CPC valve B The CPC B pressure 4B become...

Page 562: ...C Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure The CPC B pressure 5B changes to line pressure 5B at shift valve C and flows to the 4th clutch via s...

Page 563: ...ed ON and shift valve B is in the right side Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF and shift valve C is moved to the left side The PCM also controls A T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to appl...

Page 564: ...eft side Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON and shift valve B is in the right side Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON and shift valve C is in the right side Line pressure 4 becomes line pressure 5B...

Page 565: ...e pressure 3 pushes the servo valve to the reverse position passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve Line pressure 3 becomes 4th clutch pressure 40 The 4th clutch pressure 40 is ap...

Page 566: ...and 4th clutch pressure increases The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode Reverse Inhibitor Control When the E D position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speed over 6 mph...

Page 567: ...e servo valve Line pressure 3 passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve Line pressure 3 is intercepted at the manual valve and is not applied to the clutches NOTE When used left or...

Page 568: ...ing and A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the transmission housing They are controlled by the PCM General Operation Operation clutch on With the lock up clutch on flui...

Page 569: ...to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure 92 to the left side of the torque converter Torque converter pressure 92 becomes torque converter pressure 94 and enters into the left side of the...

Page 570: ...d LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock up control valve and the lock up timing valve The position of the lock up control valve depends on torque converter pressure and LS A or LS B pressure Wh...

Page 571: ...up control valve and the lock up timing valve and moves them to the left side Under this condition torque converter back pressure is released fully causing the lock up clutch to be fully engaged NOTE...

Page 572: ...Automatic Transmission System Description cont d Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH 14 62...

Page 573: ...rzz z r YEL GRN BLK A T CLUTCH A T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE CONTROL TORQUE SOLENOID VALVE A SOLENOID VALVE B CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT VALVE B VALVE C...

Page 574: ...al and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve N O Go to step 5 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Measure the resistance between the D1 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S L C YEL B 2...

Page 575: ...O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R 2P 11 Turn the ignition switch ON II 12 Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S V B S O L B L K Y E L B 25P 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 576: ...T P R WHT W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 8 NO Check for short in the wire between the D6 terminal and the transmission range switch or A T g...

Page 577: ...ectors If necessary substitute a known good PCM and recheck 12 Shift to all positions other than El 13 Measure the voltage between the D8 and B20 or B22 terminals B 25P P C M C O N N E C T O R S D 16P...

Page 578: ...l fit in the PCM connectors If necessary substitute a known good PCM and recheck 16 Shift to all positions other than CD 17 Measure the voltage between the D15 and B20 or B22 terminals B 25P P C M C O...

Page 579: ...4 Turn the ignition switch ON II 5 Shift to S position 6 Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or B22 terminals B 25P P C M C O N N E C T O R S D 16P 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 2...

Page 580: ...ween the D8 terminal and the transmission range switch NO Goto step 13 13 Shift to LI position 14 Measure the voltage between the D14 and B20 or B22 terminals B 25P P C M C O N N E C T O R S D 16P 1 2...

Page 581: ...N O G o t o step 5 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Measure the resistance between the D7 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H A B L U Y E L B 25P 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17...

Page 582: ...H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R 2P 11 Turn the ignition switch ON II 12 Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S B 25P V B S O L B L...

Page 583: ...valve B B N O G o t o step 5 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Measure the resistance between the D2 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H B G R N W H T B 25P 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 n 12 13...

Page 584: ...the voltage between the D5 and B20 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S B 25P V B S O L B L K Y E L 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 D 1 6 P 1 13 14 15 10 16 12 L G 2 B R N B...

Page 585: ...een body ground and the D10 terminal and D16 terminal individually P C M C O N N E C T O R D 16P N C BLU 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 N C S G G R N W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n...

Page 586: ...R C O N N E C T O R T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance 400 600 Q Y E S G o to step 4 NO Replace the mainshaft speed sensor 4 Disconnect PCM connector D 16P 5 Check...

Page 587: ...ir open in the wire between the D11 terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor B 10 Check for continuity between the D12 terminal and the No 2 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor connector P C M C O N...

Page 588: ...ty between body ground and the B8 terminal and the B17 terminal individually P C M C O N N E C T O R B 25P L S A W H T 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 0 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 L S A R E D W i r e side...

Page 589: ...h fuse relay box If the fuse is OK repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver s under dash fuse relay box B 10 Turn the ignition switch OFF 11 Check for continuity between the B20...

Page 590: ...D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve C N O G o t o step 5 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Measure the resistance between the D3 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S B 25P S H C GRN...

Page 591: ...D5 and B20 or B22 terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R S B 25P V B S O L B L K Y E L 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 D 16P 1 13 14 15 10 16 12 L G 2 B R N B L K L G 1 B R N B...

Page 592: ...ground and the B18 terminal and the B25 terminal individually P C M C O N N E C T O R B 25P 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 L S B GRN L S B ORN W i r e s i d e o f f e m...

Page 593: ...fuse relay box If the fuse is OK repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver s under dash fuse relay box B 10 Turn the ignition switch OFF 11 Check for continuity between the B20 a...

Page 594: ...about battery voltage Y E S G o to step 7 N O G o to step 3 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF 4 Disconnect PCM connector B 25P 5 Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector 6 Check for continuit...

Page 595: ...isconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector 13 Turn the ignition switch ON II 14 Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector terminal and body ground 2 N D C L U T C H...

Page 596: ...s Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 7 N O G o t o step 3 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF 4 Disconnect PCM connector B 25P 5 Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector 6 Check for cont...

Page 597: ...he ignition switch OFF 12 Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector 13 Turn the ignition switch ON II 14 Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector terminal and bod...

Page 598: ...s Recheck for code P0740 after troubleshooting N O G o t o step 2 NOTE Do not continue with this troubleshooting until the causes of any other DTCs have been corrected 2 Measure the line pressure Is t...

Page 599: ...he 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th clutch pressure see page 14 104 Is each clutch pressure within the service limit YES Goto step 3 NO Repair the hydraulic system as necessary 3 Replace the torque converter clutc...

Page 600: ...ol indicate another code Y E S Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code s Recheck for code P0780 after troubleshooting N O G o t o step 2 2 Turn the ignition switch OFF 3 Replace t...

Page 601: ...owchart for the indicated Code s Recheck for code P1750 after troubleshooting IMO Go to step 2 2 Turn the ignition switch OFF 3 Replace the A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B see page...

Page 602: ...her the OBD II scan tool indicates another code Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another code YES Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code s Recheck for code P1751 after troubles...

Page 603: ...to step 6 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 Reconnect PCM connector A 32P 8 Turn the ignition switch ON II 9 Shift to any positions other than S 10 Measure the voltage between the D9 terminal and body...

Page 604: ...1 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 23 24 25 L G 1 B R N B L K L G 2 B R N B L K W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 18 Turn the ignition switch OFF 19 Reconnect PCM connector B 25P 20 Connect...

Page 605: ...6 16 27 17 18 28 19 29 20 30 10 23 32 24 G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C 16P C O N N E C T O R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 14 15 16 D4 I N D G R N B L K W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the...

Page 606: ...th the throttle released and the brake pedal pressed M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T D R I V E R S B 22P C O N N E C T O R 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 X 22 ILU W H T R E D W i r e s i d...

Page 607: ...e to ground G10D B 8 Turn the ignition switch OFF 9 Disconnect PCM connectors A 32P and B 25P 10 Measure the voltage between the A32 and B20 or B22 terminals while pressing the brake pedal P C M C O N...

Page 608: ...the No 1 terminal of the throttle position sensor and the B20 or B22 terminal of the PCM P C M C O N N E C T O R B 25P 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LG1 B R N B L K S G...

Page 609: ...lock assembly NOTE Do not re key the new ignition switch Re key the other lock cylinders to match the new switch 6 Measure the voltage between the No 7 terminal and body ground K E Y S W I T C H C O N...

Page 610: ...here continuity Y E S G o to step 10 NO Repair open in the wire between No 4 terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and the No 5 terminal of the key switch connector 10 Check for continuity betw...

Page 611: ...ta List then go to step 7 If you don t have a PGM Tester go to step 5 5 Pull back the carpet from the passenger s side of the center console to expose the PCM A 6 Connect the digital multimeter B and...

Page 612: ...19 21 5 7 3rd 1st Throttle position sensor voltage 0 8 V km h 7 3 7 7 3 0 3 4 8 1 2 3rd 1st Throttle position sensor voltage 2 25 V mph 5 8 6 2 Throttle position sensor voltage 2 25 V km h 94 100 Full...

Page 613: ...ts should be used for diagnostic purposes only Stall speed should be the same in B H DD and El positions Do not test stall speed with the A T pressure gauges installed Stall Speed rpm F23A1 and F23A4...

Page 614: ...y supported 3 Set the parking brake and block rear wheels securely 4 Allow the front wheels to rotate freely 5 Warm up the engine the radiator fan comes on then stop it and connect the tachometer 6 Co...

Page 615: ...n hole D and the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole E as the transmission shifts from 2nd gear to 3rd gear then to 4th gear PRESSURE SHIFT LEVER POSITION SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE PRESSUR...

Page 616: ...d Connect the No 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal A clicking sound should be heard Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve shift solenoid valve A if no sound is heard when connec...

Page 617: ...the shift solenoid valve B or C if no clicking sound is heard Shift Solenoid Valves B and C Replacement NOTE If the shift solenoid valves B and C are replaced or removed at the same time be sure to re...

Page 618: ...uld be heard Valves A and B Test 7 Connect the No 1 terminal of the A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal and connect the No 2 terminal to the battery ne...

Page 619: ...rs from the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensors 2 Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed sensor then remove the mainshaft speed sensor A from the end cover 6 x 1 0 m m 12 N m 1 2 k g f m 8...

Page 620: ...3 Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch then install a new one with a new sealing washer Tighten the switch on the metal part not the plastic part 20IM m 2 0 k g f m 14 Ibfft 4 Reconnect the connect...

Page 621: ...5 kgfm 40 Ibf ft 3 Remove the rear mount nut A then remove the rear mount bracket B 1 25 mm Nm kgfm 40 Ibfft 4 Remove the rear stiffener A A 5 Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector A 8x...

Page 622: ...D 9 Reconnect the connector making sure there is no water oil dust or other foreign particles inside it 10 Install the rear mount bracket and loosely tighten the rear mount nut 11 Install the rear mou...

Page 623: ...eep all foreign particles out of the transmission 1 Bring the transmission up to operating temperature the radiator fan comes on by driving the vehicle 2 Park the vehicle on level ground and turn the...

Page 624: ...sembly 7 Raise the vehicle and make sure it is sacurely supported Remove the drain plug and drain the automatic transmission fluid ATF Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer 8 Remove the s...

Page 625: ...connector D and C connector E then remove the harness clamp F from the clamp bracket G 13 Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector A and remove the harness clamp B from the connector clamp b...

Page 626: ...s B and remove the damper forks C r then separate the ball joints from the lower arms D see page 18 17 20 Remove the bolts securing the radius rods E then separate the radius rods from the lower arms...

Page 627: ...amage to the control lever joint remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder before removing the bolts securing the shift cable cover 28 Remove the lock bolt D securing the control lever E then r...

Page 628: ...bracket bolts 12 x 1 25 mm bolts 2 A for all models 10 x 1 25 mm bolts 2 B for 01 02 models 34 Pull the transmission away from the engine until it clears the dowel pins then lower it on the transmissi...

Page 629: ...converter housing E 4 Install the starter F on the torque converter housing 5 Place the transmission on a transmission jack and raise it to engine level 0 6 Attach the transmission to the engine then...

Page 630: ...After tightening the last bolt check that the crankshaft rotates freely 6 x 1 0 m m 10 N m 1 0 k g f m 7 2 Ibfft 6 x 1 0 m m 12 N m 1 2 kgf m 8 7 Ibfft 6 x 1 0 m m 14 N m 1 4 k g f m 10 Ibf ft 12 Tig...

Page 631: ...ith compressed air Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully outward and slide the driveshaft into the differential until you feel its spring clip engage the side gear 19 Install the front beam A...

Page 632: ...8 N m 3 9 k g f m 28 Ibfft A 25 Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve B A and C B and install the clamp C on the clamp bracket D C 26 Connect the ATF cooler hoses E to the cooler lines F...

Page 633: ...p brackets Do n o t a l l o w w a t e r f l u i d o i l dust or other f o r e i g n particles t o get inside the 3rd clutch pressure s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r 3 1 Install the starter cables A w i...

Page 634: ...ansmission through all gears three times 42 Check the shift lever operation A T gear position indicator operation and shift cable adjustment 43 Check and adjust the front wheel alignment see page 18 5...

Page 635: ...rain 7 With the water and air valves A off attach the water and air supplies to the flusher Hot water if available OFF 8 Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds If water does not flow through the coole...

Page 636: ...y 0 95 ft 1 0 US qt 0 8 Imp qt is discharged 18 Remove the drain hose and reconnect the cooler return hose to the transmission 19 Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level see page 14 113 A...

Page 637: ...e the socket holder A on the shift cable B counterclockwise a quarter turn then slide the holder to remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket base C NOTE Do not remove the shift cable by twi...

Page 638: ...mm 0 24 in pin A into the positioning hole B on the shift lever bracket base through the positioning hole on the shift lever assembly 6 Rotate the socket holder A on the shift cable B counterclockwise...

Page 639: ...shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift cable bracket base 10 Remove the 6 0 mm 0 24 in pin that was installed to hold the shift lever 11 Connect the shift lock sol...

Page 640: ...R P L U N G E R S P R I N G S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D C L A M P S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D S H I F T L O C K S T O P C U S H I O N D E T E N T S P R I N G S H I F T L E V E R K N O B S...

Page 641: ...quarter turn then slide the holder to remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket base C NOTE Do not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide pipe D C 7 Remove the floor heat...

Page 642: ...ll the shift cable cover F then install the shift cable holder G on the cover NOTE To prevent damage to the control lever joint be sure to install the shift cable holder after installing the shift cab...

Page 643: ...ting stud B Properly Installed A B Not Properly Installed Cable end rides on the bottom of the mounting stud 23 If not properly installed remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket base and r...

Page 644: ...er to remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket base C NOTE Do not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide D 5 Push the shift cable until it stops then release your hand Pul...

Page 645: ...the mounting stud B Properly Installed A B Not Properly Installed Cable end rides on the bottom of the mounting stud 11 If not properly installed remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket b...

Page 646: ...on Index A T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR Indicator Input T e s t p a g e 14 141 indicator B u l b R e p l a c e m e n t page 14 142 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE PCM TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH Test page 14 138...

Page 647: ...OL MODULE PCM 3 I D4 IND ATP ATP ATP ATP ATP I NP A14 D R I V E R S GRN BLK UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX 0 6 D 9 j D B D 1 4 J D15 j I DIMMING U V V CIRCUIT J J A V M J K D BLK BLU WHT RED BLK RED BLK J...

Page 648: ...transmission range switch connector 2 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below NOTE Terminal No 1 Neutral position switch T r a n s m i s s i o...

Page 649: ...e connector bracket B then disconnect transmission range switch connector 5 Remove the clamp from clamp bracket on the transmission housing and remove the harness clamp A from the end cover B A C 6 Re...

Page 650: ...over C and the harness clamp D on the end cover E 11 Connect the transmission range switch connector A then install it on the connector bracket B 12 Turn the ignition switch ON II Move the shift lever...

Page 651: ...ground G501 An open in the wire C4 WHT Ignition switch ON II and shift lever in 25 Check for voltage to ground There should be 1 V or less NOTE There should be battery voltage in any other shift lever...

Page 652: ...Review the SRS component locations precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service see page 23 28 1 Remove the instrument panel see page 20 84 2 Remove the gauge as...

Page 653: ...em Component Location Index B R A K E P E D A L P O S I T I O N S W I T C H U N I T D R I V E R S S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D Input T e s t page 14 145 T e s t page 14 147 R e p l a c e m e n t...

Page 654: ...T L O C K S O L E N O I D S T E E R I N G L O C K A S S E M B L Y KEY I N T E R L O C K S W I T C H K E Y I N T E R L O C K S O L E N O I D G R N W H T R E D IG1 S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D M U...

Page 655: ...ent loose or corroded repair them as necessary and recheckthe system If the terminals look OK go to step 3 NOTE If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON II while depress...

Page 656: ...t Driver s 22P Connector Cavity W i r e Color Test C o n d i t i o n Test Desired Result Possible Cause If result is n o t obtained B11 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity t o g r o u n d Th...

Page 657: ...lock solenoid is OK If the key can be removed replace the steering lock assembly the key interlock solenoid is not available separately Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1 Remove the center console see page 20...

Page 658: ...t lock stop E 6 Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp then connect the shift lock solenoid connector Park Pin Switch Test 1 Remove the center console see page 20 83 2 Disconnect the park pin 4...

Page 659: ...S W I T C H C O V E R T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H C O N I C A L S P R I N G W A S H E R Replace LINE B O L T A T F COOLER LINE C O U N T E R S H A F T L O C K N U T Replace C O N I...

Page 660: ...emove the bolts securing the harness clamp two bolts then remove the transmission range switch 3 Remove the bolts securing the end cover 14 bolts then remove the cover 4 For 00 02 models Remove the lu...

Page 661: ...Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the transmission 8 Remove the special tool mainshaft holder from the mainshaft 9 Remove the mainshaft idler gear A and the secondary shaft idler gear B with...

Page 662: ...C 14 N m 1 4 k g f m 10 Ibf ft 3 If the measurement is out of tolerance select and install the appropriate park lever stop A from the table below PARK LEVER STOP Mark Part Number Li L2 1 24537 PA9 003...

Page 663: ...C T O R B R A C K E T T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G M O U N T I N G B O L T S REVERSE IDLER GEAR S H A F T H O L D E R A S S E M B L Y T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G C O U N T E R S H A...

Page 664: ...is not moved 5 Align the spring pin A on the control shaft B with the transmission housing groove C by turning the control shaft 0 7 H A C P K 4 0 1 0 2 6 Install the special tool over the mainshaft t...

Page 665: ...sing the special tools and a press NOTE Do not remove the snap rings unless it s necessary to clean the grooves in the housing 2 Install the bearings in the direction shown 3 Expand each snap ring wit...

Page 666: ...U L A T O R C O V E R C O O L E R C H E C K V A L V E T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E S P R I N G A T F P U M P D R I V E N G E A R...

Page 667: ...olts 7 Remove the regulator valve body eight bolts 8 Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop 9 Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm then remove the detent arm shaft detent arm and contro...

Page 668: ...with compressed air 4 Roll up half a sheet of ATF soaked 600 paper and insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve Twist the paper slightly so that it unrolls and fits the bore tightly then pol...

Page 669: ...body see page 14 163 and servo body see page 14 164 Refer to the following valve cap illustrations and install each valve cap so the end shown facing up will be facing the outside of the valve body 3...

Page 670: ...sages 2 Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball it may magnetize the ball 3 Check all valves for free movement If any fail to slide freely refer to Valve Body Repair see page 14 158 4 Repla...

Page 671: ...7 0 028 6 6 0 260 32 2 1 268 13 4 Shift valve D spring 0 7 0 028 6 6 0 260 35 7 1 406 17 2 Shift valve C spring 0 8 0 031 6 6 0 260 49 1 1 933 21 7 Modulator valve spring 1 6 0 063 10 4 0 409 33 5 1...

Page 672: ...pump drive gear A and driven gear B ATF Pump Gears Side Radial Clearance Standard New ATF Pump Drive Gear 0 2100 265 mm 0 0083 0 0104 in ATF Pump Driven Gear 0 070 0 125 mm 0 0028 0 0049 in A 3 Remov...

Page 673: ...slowly so it does not pop out 5 Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly Install the filter in the direction shown 6 Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body the...

Page 674: ...s are worn or damaged 4 Coat all parts with ATF during assembly S H I F T V A L V E A SPRING SPECIFICATIONS No Spring Standard New Unit mm in No Spring Wire Dia O D Free Length No of Coils Shift valve...

Page 675: ...at all parts with ATF during reassembly L U B R I C A T I O N CHECK V A L V E Replace S N A P R I N G S SPRING SPECIFICATIONS No Springs Standard New Unit mm in Wire Dia O D Free Length No of Coils 1s...

Page 676: ...Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746 0010500 Attachment 72 x 75 mm 07746 0010600 1 Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the special tool 07736 A01000A 2 Drive in the new mainshaft bearing until it bo...

Page 677: ...all the ATF guide plate A 3 Install the new bearing B into the housing C with the special tools Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Adjustable bearing puller 25 40 mm 07736 A010...

Page 678: ...ings are worn distorted or damaged replace them see page 14 170 T H R U S T W A S H E R 27 x 47 x 5 m m T H R U S T N E E D L E B E A R I N G H E X HED B O L T 6 x 1 0 m m 12 N m 1 2 k g f m 8 7 Ibfft...

Page 679: ...at least 3 places Use the mainshaft D average as the actual clearance 4 If the clearance is out of standard remove the thrust shim and measure its thickness 5 Select and install a new shim then reche...

Page 680: ...only if they are worn distorted or damaged 1 For a better fit squeeze the sealing ring together slightly before installing them 2 Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install them on the mainshaft...

Page 681: ...e page 14 174 4 Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement 5 Check the splines for excessive wear and damage 6 Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring...

Page 682: ...between the puller and countershaft E to prevent damaging the countershaft NOTE Some of the reverse selector hubs are not pressfitted and can be removed without using a puller 2 Remove the needle bea...

Page 683: ...press the countershaft into the 3rd gear with a press Place an attachment between the press and countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft Stop pressing the countershaft when the 3rd gear cont...

Page 684: ...00 1 Check t h e b e a r i n g f o r w e a r d a m a g e a n d r o u g h m o v e m e n t If t h e bearing is w o r n or d a m a g e d replace it 2 R e m o v e t h e bearing A f r o m t h e b e a r i n...

Page 685: ...he conical spring washer and 38 x 56 5 mm splined washer in the direction shown S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T T H R U S T N E E D L E B E A R I N G N E E D L E B E A R I N G 1 S T G E A R T H R U S T N...

Page 686: ...er E and cotters F with a feeler gauge J in at least three places Use the average as the actual clearance STANDARD 0 07 0 15 mm 0 003 0 006 in J 4 If the clearance is out of standard remove the spline...

Page 687: ...three places while moving the 2nd gear E Use the average as the actual clearance STANDARD 0 04 0 12 mm 0 002 0 005 in E 10 If the clearance is out of standard remove the 37 x 55 mm thrust shim and me...

Page 688: ...If the bearing is worn or damaged replace it 2 Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with soft jaws 3 Remove the bearing A from the secondary shaft idler gear B with a commercially availables...

Page 689: ...1 Remove the snap ring A then remove the clutch end plate the clutch discs and the plates with a screwdriver B 2 Remove the disc spring from the 3rd and 4th clutches 3 Remove the wave spring from the...

Page 690: ...L 6 Set the special tool A on the spring retainer B of the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the special tool works on the clutch return spring C 4 pL O 7 If either end of the special tool is s...

Page 691: ...C return s p r i n g 10 For 3rd a n d 4th c l u t c h W r a p a s h o p rag a r o u n d the clutch d r u m A a n d a p p l y air p r e s s u r e t o the fluid passage t o r e m o v e t h e p i s t o...

Page 692: ...d a r d thickness 1 94 m m 0 076 in C L U T C H D I S C S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s 1 94 m m 0 076 in S N A P R I N G C L U T C H E N D P L A T E C L U T C H P L A T E S S t a n d a r d t h i...

Page 693: ...94 m m 0 076 i n C L U T C H E N D P L A T E C L U T C H DISCS S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s 1 94 m m 0 076 in S N A P RING C L U T C H E N D P L A T E C L U T C H P L A T E S S t a n d a r d t h...

Page 694: ...ughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner and dry them with compressed air Blow out all passages Apply ATF to all parts before assembly 1 Inspect the check valve A on the 3rd and 4th clutches if it s loo...

Page 695: ...1 0 0 0 7 L A E P X 4 0 1 0 0 or 07HAE PL50101 0 7 G A E P G 4 0 2 0 0 or 0 7 G A E P G 4 0 2 0 A 6 Be sure the special tool A is adjusted to have full contact with the spring retainer B on the 3rd an...

Page 696: ...the spring retainer which is unsupported by the return spring the retainer may be damaged 9 Compress the return spring 10 Install the snap ring A 11 Remove the special tools 12 Install the disc spring...

Page 697: ...and other foreign matter 15 Starting with a clutch plate alternately install the clutch plates and discs Install the clutch end plate A with the flat side toward the disc B 17 Set a dial indicator A o...

Page 698: ...lect a new clutch end plate from the following table NOTE If the thickest clutch end plate is installed but the clearance is still over the standard replace the clutch discs and clutch plates 1ST and...

Page 699: ...E T E N T B A S E A T F S T R A I N E R A C C U M U L A T O R C O V E R C O O L E R C H E C K V A L V E S P R I N G C O O L E R C H E C K V A L V E T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E T...

Page 700: ...ghten the bolts to the specified torque then recheck Failure to align the ATF pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear shaft 4 Install the c...

Page 701: ...place SPECIAL B O L T 01 02 m o d e l s Replace T R A N S M I S S I O N H A N G E R C O N N E C T O R B R A C K E T M A I N S H A F T S U B A S S E M B L Y 6 x 1 0 m m 12 N m 1 2 k g f m 8 7 I b f f t...

Page 702: ...A so the large chamfered hole is facing the fork bolt hole Then install the shift fork B and reverse selector C together on the shift fork shaft and countershaft D Secure the shift fork to the shift...

Page 703: ...C new gasket D harness clamp bracket E and the A T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B F over the ATF feed pipes on the transmission housing E F B 10 Coat the reverse idler gear shaft A n...

Page 704: ...ng parts with ATF Splines of the countershaft park gear and old locknut Threads of the countershaft and old locknut Old conical spring washer 3 Install the park gear A using the old locknut B and a co...

Page 705: ...locknut G to seat the bearing hub bearing assembly to 164 N m 17 0 kgfm 123 Ibfft NOTE Do not use an impact wrench Always use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut 7 Set the dial indicator A to the...

Page 706: ...5 0 1 0 1 or 0 7 G A B P F 5 0 1 0 0 Splines of the mainshaft secondary shaft and idler gears Threads of the mainshaft and secondary shaft Threads of the old mainshaft and secondary shaft locknuts Old...

Page 707: ...21 Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3 5 mm punch 22 For 00 02 models Install the pitot flange A on the mainshaft idler gear B then install the lubrication pitot pipe C and the pitot pipe D o...

Page 708: ...on range switch to Offi position NOTE The transmission range switch clicks in HI position cont d 28 Set the control shaft to the El position by turning it NOTE Be careful not to squeeze the end of the...

Page 709: ...cover F 31 Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing washers Tighten the line fittings to 28 N m 2 9 kgf m 21 Ibf ft 32 Install the breather tube 33 Install the ATF dipstick For 01 02 models follo...

Page 710: ...CARRIER B E A R I N G R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 14 202 F I N A L D R I V E N G E A R R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 14 201 D I F F E R E N T I A L CARRIER Backlash I n s p e c t i o n p a g e 14 2...

Page 711: ...al carrier STANDARD 0 05 0 15 mm 0 002 0 006 in Final Driven Gear Carrier Replacement 1 Remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier NOTE The final driven gear bolts have left hand threa...

Page 712: ...d adjust the bearing preload whenever bearing is replaced 1 Remove the tapered roller bearing A with a bearing puller B a bearing separator C and a stepper adapter D 2 Using the small end of the speci...

Page 713: ...the oil seal A from the transmission housing B 3 Remove the oil seal A from the torque converter housing B 4 Install the oil seal A in the transmission housing with the special tools 07749 0010000 0...

Page 714: ...he bearing outer race from the transmission housing by heating the housing to about 212 F 100 C with a heat gun Do not heat the housing more than 212 F 100 C 2 Remove the bearing outer race from the t...

Page 715: ...e replaced 3 Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing side 0 4 Select the 2 60 mm 0 102 in thrust shim from the middle of the table below THRUST SHIM 76 mm No Part Number Thickness S 41438 PX...

Page 716: ...ing 0 7 7 4 9 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 7 H A D S F 1 0 1 0 0 8 Install the differential assembly A gasket B and dowel pins C on the torque converter housing D Align the spring pin on the control shaft E with t...

Page 717: ...room temperature in both directions STANDARD New bearing 2 7 3 9 N m 2 8 4 0 kgfcm 2 4 3 5 Ibf in Reused bearings 2 5 3 6 N m 2 5 3 7 kgfcm 2 2 3 2 Ibf in 12 To increase the starting torque increase...

Page 718: ......

Page 719: ...n 16 3 Driveshafts Removal 16 3 Driveshafts Disassembly 16 5 Driveshafts Reassembly 16 9 Driveshafts Installation 16 20 Intermediate Shaft Removal 16 21 Intermediate Shaft Disassembly 16 22 Intermedia...

Page 720: ...Joint Remover 28 mm 1 D 07XAC 001020A Threaded Adapter 24 x 1 5 mm 1 07746 0010300 Attachment 42 x 47 mm 1 07746 0030100 Driver 40 mm I D 1 07749 0010000 Driver 1 07947 SD90101 Oil Seal Driver Attachm...

Page 721: ...uired Ball joint remover 28 mm 07MAC SL00200 1 Loosen the wheel nuts slightly 2 Raise the front of the vehicle and support it with safety stands in the proper locations see page 1 17 3 Remove the whee...

Page 722: ...e the driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub using a plastic hammer 10 Pry out the inboard joint A with a prybar and remove the driveshaft from the differential case or bearing support as...

Page 723: ...type A cut the boot band B If the boot band is a double loop type C lift up the band bend D and push it into the clip E If the boot band is a low profile type F pinch and remove the boot band with a c...

Page 724: ...used on 98 00 M T models 5 Remove the circlip E 6 Mark the spider D and driveshaft F to identify the position of the spider on the shaft 7 Remove the spider 8 Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with v...

Page 725: ...e C lift up the band bend D and push it into the clip E If the boot band is an ear clamp type F lift up the three tabs G with a screwdriver If the boot band is the locking tabs type pry up the tabs wi...

Page 726: ...mark A on the driveshaft B at the same position of the outboard joint end C 8 Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft 5 Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise 0 7 X A C 0 0 1 0 2 0 A 6 Remove the...

Page 727: ...Pack cavity w i t h grease DRIVESHAFT D Y N A M I C D A M P E R Left d r i v e s h a f t f o r A T m o d e l s R u b b e r t y p e STOP RING Replace DOUBLE LOOP B A N D Replace D O U B L E L O O P B A...

Page 728: ...Driveline Axle Driveshafts Reassembly cont d Exploded View 01 02 models 16 10...

Page 729: ...shaft then remove the vinyl tape Take care not to damage the inboard boot and dynamic damper 3 Install the spider A onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks B on the spider and the end of the drivesh...

Page 730: ...M T models align the roller holders C with the grooves in the inboard joint 98 00 models 8 Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure below then adjust the boots to halfway between full compr...

Page 731: ...er then hook the tab C of the band B 12 Close the hook portion of the band with a commercially available boot band pincers A then hook the tabs B of the band 13 Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft a...

Page 732: ...band meets the edge of the clip 18 Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees to the clip Center punch the clip then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip 19 Unwind t...

Page 733: ...he splines with vinyl tape A to prevent damage to the outboard boot Rubber Type 2 Install the new boot bands B ear clamp type 3 Install the outboard boot Take care not to damage the outboard boot 4 Re...

Page 734: ...d joint B until the stop ring C is close on the joint P u s h 7 To completely seat the outboard joint pick up the driveshaft and joint and drop them from about 10 cm 4 in onto a hard surface Do not us...

Page 735: ...50 g 4 9 5 3 oz 10 Install the outboard boot and boot bands For TPE type boot go to step 20 For rubber type boot go to step 11 11 Fit the boot A ends onto the driveshaft B and outboard joint C 12 Set...

Page 736: ...he band meets the edge of the clip 17 Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 to the clip Center punch the clip then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip 18 Unwind the boo...

Page 737: ...0 16 19...

Page 738: ...solvent or carburetor cleaner and dry with compressed air Insert the inboard end A of the driveshaft into the differential B or intermediate shaft C unitl the set ring D locks in the groove E A D E B...

Page 739: ...ting surfaces of the brake disc and the front wheel then install the front wheel with the wheel nuts 11 Tighten the flange bolts and the self locking nut with the vehicles weight on the damper 12 Refi...

Page 740: ...0100 Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746 0010300 1 Remove the intermediate shaft outer seal A from the bearing support B 2 Remove the external snap ring C 3 Press the intermediate shaft A out of the intermedi...

Page 741: ...5 Press the intermediate shaft bearing A out of the bearing support B using the special tools and a press 07965 SD90100...

Page 742: ...Driveline Axle Intermediate Shaft Reassembly Exploded View P a c k t h e interior of t h e outer seal 3 0 4 0 g f 0 1 1 0 1 4 oz 16 24...

Page 743: ...led parts with solvent and dry them with compressed air Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent 2 Press the intermediate shaft bearing A into the bearing support B using the special tools and a pres...

Page 744: ...Shaft Installation 1 Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft A contacts the transmission differential thoroughly with solvent or carburetor cleaner and dry with compressed air Insert the interme...

Page 745: ...elt Inspection and Adjustment 17 12 Fluid Replacement 17 14 Hoses and Lines Replacement 17 15 Pump Replacement 17 16 Pump Overhaul 17 17 Steering Wheel Removal 17 22 Steering Wheel Disassembly and Rea...

Page 746: ...ment 1 07NAG SR3090A Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1 07RAK S040110 P S Joint Adaptor Pump 1 07RAK S040121 P S Joint Adaptor Hose 1 07406 0010001 or07406 001000A P S Pressure Gauge 1 07725 0030000 Univer...

Page 747: ...BLE REEL Removal Installation page 23 289 STEERING C O L U M N Steering C o l u m n Removal and Installation page 17 25 Steering C o l u m n Inspection page 17 27 Steering Lock Replacement page 17 28...

Page 748: ...steering s y s t e m due to low fluid level 5 Check for l o w fluid level in t h e p o w e r steering reservoir due t o possible leaks in system 6 Replace the steering gearbox see page 17 30 Steering...

Page 749: ...m the cylinder line A or B connections flare nuts Tighten the connection and retest If it still leaks replace the line Fluid leaks f r o m a d a m a g e d cylinder line A or B Replace the cylinder lin...

Page 750: ...e 17 9 with T N 07406 001000A see page 17 10 with both pressure gauge valves open if so equipped while turning the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the right Is the pressure 7 200 7 800 k...

Page 751: ...R O T A T I O N A L P L A Y 0 1 0 m m 0 0 3 9 in Power Assist Check 1 Check the power steering fluid level see page 17 14 and pump belt tension see page 17 12 2 Start the engine let it idle and turn t...

Page 752: ...Power Steering Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection Inspect for damage and deterioration 17 8...

Page 753: ...to the P S joint adapter pump 5 Fully open the shut off valve A 9 10 6 Fully open the pressure control valve B 7 Start the engine and let it idle 8 Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several ti...

Page 754: ...ssure gauge to the P S joint adapter pump 5 Open the pressure control valve A fully 6 Start the engine and let it idle 7 Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to warm the fluid to op...

Page 755: ...heck for leaks at the pump seal inlet and outlet fittings HOSES and LINES Inspect hoses for damage leaks interference and twisting Inspect fluid lines for damage rusting and leakage Check for leaks at...

Page 756: ...eset lever Tension Used Belt 390 5 4 0 N 40 New Belt 740 880 N 75 0 7 J G G 0 0 1 0 0 0 A or 0 7 J G G 0 0 1 0 1 0 A 55 kgf 88 121 Ibf 90 kgf 165 198 Ibf Adjustment 4 Loosen the power steering pump mo...

Page 757: ...ngine for 5 minutes then readjust the belt to the used belt specification Adjustment 3 Loosen the power steering pump mounting bolt A and pump lock bolt B A 2 2 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibfft 22 N m 2 2 k g...

Page 758: ...t to spill the fluid on the body and parts Wipe off any spilled fluid at once 2 Connect a hose B of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose and put the hose end in a suitable container 3 Sta...

Page 759: ...d power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP A HOSE CLAMP B 2 5 5 5 m m 0 01 0 22 in 2 0 4 0 m m 0 0 8 0 1 6 in 2 5 5 5 m m 10 01 0 22 in C...

Page 760: ...ing bolt and pump lock bolt then remove the pump Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed 6 Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the...

Page 761: ...R e p l a c e O U T E R SIDE P L A T E P U M P C A M R I N G P U M P V A N E S 10 plates 5 m m R O L L E R P U M P R O T O R S I D E P L A T E 1 5 2 x 2 4 m m O RING R e p l a c e 5 1 x 2 4 m m O R I...

Page 762: ...ring 5 Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal 6 Remove the outer side plate pump cam ring pump rotor pump vanes side plate and O rings 7 Remove the snap ring then remove the sub valve from the pump...

Page 763: ...ll bearing A and install a new one B 15 Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the Exploded View if any of them are worn or damaged replace the pump as an assembly Reassembly 16 Clean the disasse...

Page 764: ...rs with its mark B facing up 24 Assemble pump rotor A to the pump cover B 25 Set the 10 vanes C in the grooves in the rotor Make sure that the round ends D of the vanes are in contact with the sliding...

Page 765: ...m 3 6 Ibf ft 31 Coat the new O ring C with power steering fluid and install it on the flow control valve cap D then install the cap on the pump housing and tighten it 32 Install the pulley A then loos...

Page 766: ...dio remote switches connector and cruise control switches connector if equipped 3 Loosen the steering wheel bolt A then install a steering wheel puller B on the steering wheel and remove it Note these...

Page 767: ...Steering Wheel Disassembly Reassembly S T E E R I N G W H E E L C R U I S E C O N T R O L S W I T C H 17...

Page 768: ...stall the steering wheel on to the steering column shaft making sure the steering wheel hub C engages the pins D of the cable reel and tabs of the canceling sleeve Do not tap on the steering wheel or...

Page 769: ...models see page 23 289 01 02 models see page 23 292 3 Remove the driver s dashboard lower cover see page 20 84 4 Remove the column covers A 22 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 I b f f t B 16 N m 1 6 k g f m 12 I b...

Page 770: ...he shaft and loosely install the lower joint bolt Be sure that the lower joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft 4 Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is f...

Page 771: ...ovement If any bearing is noisy or has is excessive play replace the steering column as an assembly Check the retaining collar C for damage If it is damaged replace the steering column as an assembly...

Page 772: ...preload by turning the tilt lock bolt D left or right Pull up the tilt lever to the uppermost position and install the stop Check the preload again If the measurement is still out of specification rep...

Page 773: ...sealant all around the threads C Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox 7 Check for unusual steering effort through the complete turning travel 8 Check the steering wheel rotati...

Page 774: ...ble reel can occur 1 Drain the power steering fluid see page 17 14 2 Raise the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported 3 Remove the front wheels 4 Remove the driver s airbag see page 23 278 5 R...

Page 775: ...left tie rod ends A and locknut B A 14 Remove the 3 way catalytic converter see page 9 5 15 Disconnect the M T shift cable see page 13 4 or A T shift cable see page 14 114 from the transmission 16 Rem...

Page 776: ...I N G C Y L I N D E R L I N E A S N A P R I N G Replace S L E E V E S L E E V E S E A L R I N G S Replace V A L V E S E A L R I N G R e p l a c e V A L V E O I L S E A L Replace L O C K N U T R A C K...

Page 777: ...ent commercially available NOTE Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure Disassembly 1 Remove the steering gearbox see page 17 30 2 Remove the boot bands A and tie rod clips B Pull t...

Page 778: ...m 0 12 in diameter hole approximately 2 5 3 0 mm 0 10 0 12 in in depth in the staked point A on the cylinder Do not allow metal shavings to enter the cylinder housing After removing the cylinder end B...

Page 779: ...steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed clear Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder housing with the tool 15 Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering rack 16 Inse...

Page 780: ...end seal Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal Do not try to remove the seal by striking the tool It will break the backup ring and the cylinder end seal will remain in the gearbox 18 Carefully...

Page 781: ...heck for wear burrs and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the sleeve NOTE The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision matched set If either the pinion shaft or sleeve must be replaced replac...

Page 782: ...seal A and wave washer B from the pinion shaft 27 Press the valve oil seal A and bushing B out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool A 28 Clean the disassembled parts with sol...

Page 783: ...eering fluid 33 Fit the new O ring B in the groove of the pinion shaft Then slide the new valve seal ring C over the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft 34 Remove the tape and apply power stee...

Page 784: ...teering fluid to the seal rings on the sleeve and to the entire inside surface of the special tool then slowly insert the sleeve into the special tool 0 7 9 7 4 S A 5 0 2 0 0 or 0 7 9 7 4 S A 5 0 2 0...

Page 785: ...n shaft sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it 48 Coat the special tool with power steering fluid then slide it onto the rack big end first 49 Position the new O ring A and new piston seal...

Page 786: ...es then coat the surface of the tape with power steering fluid Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion A 54 Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end se...

Page 787: ...e tool and center the steering rack 61 Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges and coat the surface of the tape with the power steering fluid Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so th...

Page 788: ...r B 68 Coat the new O ring A with grease and carefully fit it on the valve housing D 20 N m 2 0 k g f m 14 Ibfft 69 Apply grease to the needle bearing B in the gearbox housing then install the valve b...

Page 789: ...eads on the rack guide screw B then install the spring C rack guide screw and locknut D 74 Adjust the rack guide screw see page 17 29 After adjusting check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding it r...

Page 790: ...e new boot bands by aligning the tabs A circumference of the rack end joint housing with holes B of the band 79 Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot 82 Close the ear portion A of the band...

Page 791: ...e bulkhead 4 Install the pinion shaft grommet A Align the slot B in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion on the valve housing A 5 Install the mounting cushion A on the steering gearbox C G 38...

Page 792: ...ve in the pinion shaft Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is fully seated Then install the upper joint bolt and tighten it 22 Nm 2 2 kgfm 16 Ibfft 22 Nm 2 2 kgf m 16 Ibfft...

Page 793: ...A T shift cable see step 13 on page 14 120 from the transmission 17 Install the three way catalytic converter see page 9 5 18 Install the front wheels 19 Fill the system with power steering fluid and...

Page 794: ...t B and lip C with fresh multipurpose grease Note these items when installing new grease Keep grease off the boot installation section D and the tapered section E if the ball pin Do not allow dust dir...

Page 795: ...ment 18 10 Ball Joint Boot Replacement 18 15 Upper Arm Replacement 18 16 Lower Arm Replacement 18 17 Damper Spring Replacement 18 18 Rear Suspension Hub Bearing Replacement Disc Brake 18 22 Hub Bearin...

Page 796: ...tion Qty 07GAF SE00100 Hub Dis Assembly Tool 07GAG SD40700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1 07MAC SL00200 Ball Joint Remover 28 mm 1 07965 SA00600 Bearing Driver Attachment 1 07749 0010000 Driver 1 07947...

Page 797: ...Component Location Index Front Suspension KNUCKLE HUB Replacement page 18 10 18 3...

Page 798: ...Front and Rear Suspension Component Location Index cont d Rear Suspension R e p l a c e m e n t page 18 28 HUB includes bearing R e p l a c e m e n t page 18 22 18 4...

Page 799: ...ment Caster angle can be adjusted by increasing decreasing the number of the adjusting shims Remove and install the radius rod each time the caster angle is adjusted 1 Raise the front of the vehicle a...

Page 800: ...ignment caster camber toe and or turning angle Follow the equipment manufacturer s instructions 1 Check the tire pressure 2 Center the steering wheel spokes 3 Check the toe with the wheels pointed str...

Page 801: ...king nut B 10 x 1 2 5 m m 54 N m 5 5 k g f m 40 Ibfft 4 Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct 5 Install the self locking nut and tighten it while holding the adjus...

Page 802: ...ring end play measurement is more than the standard replace the wheel bearing 1 Raise the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported 2 Check for bent or deformed wheels 3 Set up the dial gauge as...

Page 803: ...essure bolt 0 7 M A C S L 0 0 2 0 0 4 Once the special tool is in place turn the adjusting bolt A as necessary to make the jaws parallel Then hand tighten the pressure bolt B and recheck the jaws to m...

Page 804: ...m a g e C O T T E R P I N R e p l a c e C A S T L E N U T 12 x 1 25 m m 4 9 5 9 N m 5 0 6 0 k g f m 3 6 4 3 Ibfft W A S H E R S C R E W 6 x 14 m m 9 3 N m 0 95 k g f m 6 9 Ibf ft 6 m m B R A K E D I...

Page 805: ...f m 6 9 Ibfft B 108 N m 11 0 k g f m 80 Ibfft 6 Remove the caliper mounting bolts B and hang the caliper assembly C to one side To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose use a short piec...

Page 806: ...B and remove the nut 0 7 M A C S L 0 0 2 0 0 15 Remove the lower ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool see page 18 9 16 Remove the cotter pin A from the upper bail joint castle nut B and...

Page 807: ...p ring A and the splash guard B from the knuckle C C A 21 Press the wheel bearing A out of the knuckle B using the special tools and a press Press A 22 Press the wheel bearing inner race A from the hu...

Page 808: ...particular attention to the following items Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values Torque the castle nuts...

Page 809: ...or other foreign materials get into the boot 4 Install the boot on the ball joint then squeeze it gently to force out any air 5 For a lower ball joint adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt B...

Page 810: ...he flange bolts A from the upper arm B B 6 5 k g f m 47 Ibfft 7 Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal and note these items Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting...

Page 811: ...izer link A 2 Remove the radius rod bolts B 3 Remove the lower arm mounting bolt C 4 Remove the lower arm D from the rear beam A 10 x 1 25 m m 39 N m 4 0 k g f m 29 Ibfft 6 Install the lower arm in th...

Page 812: ...E D U S T C O V E R P L A T E D U S T C O V E R C h e c k f o r b e n d i n g a n d d a m a g e R U B B E R B U S H I N G Check f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n a n d d a m a g e S P R I N G C U S H I...

Page 813: ...assembly Inspection 1 Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor A according to the manufacturer s instructions then remove the self locking nut B Do not compress...

Page 814: ...pt for the washer and self locking n u t Align the bottom of the damper spring and the spring lower seat B 3 Position the mount base A on the damper unit 0 3 4 Compress the damper spring with the spri...

Page 815: ...ned with the slot in the damper fork 1 0 x 1 2 5 m m 43 N m 4 4 k g f m 32 Ibfft 3 Loosely install the damper pinch bolt E into the damper fork 4 Loosely install a new self locking nut F with the flan...

Page 816: ...Rear Suspension Hub Bearing Replacement Disc Brake Exploded View W H E E L N U T 1 2 x 1 5 m m 108 N m 11 0 k g f m 8 0 Ibfft 18 22...

Page 817: ...iece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage 9 Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws A 10 Screw two 8 x 1 25 mm bolts B into the disc C to push it away from the hub Turn each bolt 2 t...

Page 818: ...Rear Suspension Hub Bearing Replacement Drum Brake Exploded View W H E E L N U T 12 x 1 5 m m 108 N m 11 0 k g f m 8 0 Ibf ft 18 24...

Page 819: ...against the spindle Special Tools Required Ball joint remover 28 mm 07MAC SL00200 1 Raise the rear of the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported then remove the rear wheel 2 Remove the rear br...

Page 820: ...3 Remove the lower arm mounting bolt A and nut B then remove the knuckle A 12 x 1 25 m m 5 9 N m 6 0 k g f m 43 Ibfft 14 Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal and pay particular attentio...

Page 821: ...arm B from the vehicle B A 12 x 1 25 m m 59 N m 6 0 k g f m 43 Ibfft 7 Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal and note these items Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when conn...

Page 822: ...the wheel clean the mating surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust it if necessary see page 18 5 Leading Arm Replacement 1 Raise the rear of t...

Page 823: ...the wheel Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust it if necessary see page 18 5 Control Arm Replacement 1 Raise the rear of the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported Remove the rear wheel...

Page 824: ...9 N m 3 0 k g f m 2 2 Ibfft Replace W A S H E R Check for weakness R U B B E R B U S H I N G M O U N T B A S E C O L L A R R U B B E R B U S H I N G R U B B E R S P R I N G M O U N T C U S H I O N Che...

Page 825: ...self locking nut B Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self locking nut A B 2 Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor then disassemble the damper as shown in th...

Page 826: ...or the washer and self locking nut Align the bottom of the damper spring and the spring lower seat B A 5 Install the washer A and loosely install a new self locking nut B B 10 x 1 25 m m 29 N m 3 0 k...

Page 827: ...g f m 43 I b f f t 3 Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand 4 Tighten the flange bolt and nut on the bottom of the damper to the specified torque...

Page 828: ......

Page 829: ...0 Front Brake Disc Inspection 19 12 Front Brake Caliper Overhaul 19 13 Master Cylinder Replacement 19 14 Master Cylinder Inspection 19 15 Master Cylinder Pushrod Clearance Adjustment 19 15 Brake Boost...

Page 830: ...Conventional Brake Components Special Tools Ref No Tool Number Description Qty 07JAG SD40100 Pushrod Adjustment Gauge 1 I 19 2...

Page 831: ...ke Pedal a n d Brake Pedal P o s i t i o n S w i t c h A d j u s t m e n t p a g e 19 5 B R A K E H O S E S L I N E S Brake H o s e s a n d L i n e s I n s p e c t i o n p a g e 19 30 Brake H o s e s...

Page 832: ...pedal stroke between quick and slow brake applications Replace the master cylinder if there is a difference in pedal stroke Brake Hoses C Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage Replace the brake ho...

Page 833: ...t tighten the locknut firmly Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed 4 Screw in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed threaded end A touching the pad B on...

Page 834: ...ess the brake pedal several times to set the self adjusting brake before adjusting the parking brake 1 Block the front wheels then raise the rear of the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported...

Page 835: ...ked after bleeding each brake caliper Add fluid as required 1 Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX upper level line A 2 Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times...

Page 836: ...U S E R E L A Y BOX B L K Y E L BACK UP LIGHT 7 5A cr j3 Y E L G R N R E D G R N R E D DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT G R N R E D G R N R E D GRN WHT Canadaj U S A j v7 To A B S CONTROL UNIT PAR...

Page 837: ...brake switch is OK but the brake system indicator does not function do the input test for the daytime running lights control unit see page 22 96 Brake Fluid Level Switch Test 1 Remove the reservoir ca...

Page 838: ...m the knuckle A 9 8 N m 1 0 k g f m 7 2 Ibfft 3 Remove pin A B and pivot the caliper C up out of the way Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration 4 Remove the pad shims A pad retaine...

Page 839: ...ds Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down 13 Pivot the caliper down into position Being careful not to damage the pin boot install the caliper b...

Page 840: ...it for refinishing replace it see page 18 10 A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0 10 m m 0 004 in Thickness and Parallelism 1 Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly then raise...

Page 841: ...reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency Do not reuse drained brake fluid Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid Non Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion a...

Page 842: ...der To prevent spills cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels D 8 x 1 25 m m 15 N m 1 5 k g f m 11 Ibfft 6 Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts B and washers 7 Remove the master cylinder C...

Page 843: ...Pushrod Adjustment Gauge 07JAG SD40100 NOTE Master cylinder pushrod to piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made if necessary before installing the master cylinder 1 Set the special tool A...

Page 844: ...rechecked Clearance 0 0 4 mm 0 0 02 in 6 If the clearance is incorrect loosen the star locknut A and turn the adjuster B in or out to adjust Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied...

Page 845: ...ty A slight change in pedal height when the A C compressor cycles on and off is normal The A C compressor load changes the vacuum available to the booster Leak Test Booster Check Valve Test 1 Disconne...

Page 846: ...he cotter pin A and joint pin B B C 8 x 1 25 m m 13 N m 1 3 k g f m 9 4 Ibfft 6 Remove the four booster mounting nuts C 7 Pull the brake booster A forward then turn it to the right until the clevis B...

Page 847: ...ng brake 3 Remove the brake hose A from the suspension arm by removing the mounting bolt B Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to prevent dust and dirt from entering inside Support the caliper...

Page 848: ...ency ment cont d 13 Rotate the caliper piston A clockwise into the cylinder then align the cutout B in the piston with the tab C on the inner pad by turning the piston back Lubricate the boot with rub...

Page 849: ...is greater than 0 10 mm 0 004 in Thickness and Parallelism 1 Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly then raise the vehicle and make sure it is securely supported Remove the rear wheels 2 Remove the brake...

Page 850: ...passages with compressed air Before reassembling check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration Make sure no dirt or oth...

Page 851: ...K I N G L E V E R C A M A S S E M B L Y S P R I N G C A S E R E T U R N S P R I N G B R A K E P A D S O U T E R P A D S H I M C O N N E C T O R R e p l a c e P A D S P R I N G r s E L r 4 G R E A S E...

Page 852: ...ft S E A L I N G W A S H E R S Replace B L E E D S C R E W 9 N m 0 9 k g f m 6 5 Ibfft C A L I P E R B O D Y S L E E V E P I S T O N A D J U S T I N G B O L T S P A C E R C I R C L I P P I S T O N A S...

Page 853: ...r k e d left a n d r i g h t A D J U S T E R B O L T Check r a t c h e t t e e t h f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e P A R K I N G B R A K E L E V E R a r k e d left a n d r i g h t U P P E R R E T U R...

Page 854: ...n 6 If the brake lining thickness is less than the service limit replace the brake shoes as a set 7 Check the bearings in the hub unit for smooth operation If it requires servicing replace it see step...

Page 855: ...shoe assembly A and remove the lower return spring B Make sure not to damage the dust cover on the wheel cylinder A D C A B 4 Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever 5 Remove...

Page 856: ...juster bolt C 12 Hook the self adjuster spring D to the adjuster lever first then to the brake shoe 13 Install the clevises and upper return spring E noting the installation direction Be careful not t...

Page 857: ...may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint wash it off immediately with water To prevent spills cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels Use only a genuine Honda wheel cylinder...

Page 858: ...fft B R A K E H O S E t o C A L I P E R B A N J O B O L T 34 N m 3 5 k g f m 25 Ibfft B L E E D S C R E W 9 N m 0 9 k g f m 6 5 Ibfft D I S C B R A K E B R A K E H O S E t o C A L I P E R B A N J O B...

Page 859: ...A from the brake hose B 4 Remove the banjo bolt C and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper 5 Remove the brake hose from the knuckle 6 Install the brake hose A on the knuckle with 2 6 mm flange...

Page 860: ...Conventional Brake Components Parking Brake Cable Replacement Exploded View P A R K I N G B R A K E LEVER Check f o r s m o o t h o p e r a t i o n 19 32...

Page 861: ...ease the parking brake lever fully and remove the brake hose clip A from the parking brake cable C Rear Drum Brake DX and LX Type 1 Remove the brake shoe assembly see page 19 27 2 Remove the parking b...

Page 862: ...19 34...

Page 863: ...mation 19 37 DTC Troubleshooting Index 19 40 Sympton Troubleshooting Index 19 41 System Description 19 42 Circuit Diagram 19 50 DTC Troubleshooting 19 52 ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting 19 67 Mo...

Page 864: ...70 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 19 71 D R I V E R S U N D E R D A S H F U S E R E L A Y B O X D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R DLC A B S C O N T R O L U N I T R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 19 70 R I...

Page 865: ...ht after the engine is started if the system is OK Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Self diagnosis Self diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories Initial diagnosis Done right after the engine starts an...

Page 866: ...ting clear the DTC and test drive the vehicle Make sure the ABS indicator does not come on How to Retrieve ABS DTCs 1 Connect the Honda PGM Tester A to the 16P Data Link Connector B located behind the...

Page 867: ...Vehicle speed is 6 mph 10 km h or less SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before the ignition switch is turned ON II The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition switch is turned ON II d A B S in...

Page 868: ...lser see page 19 54 DTC 23 Right rear pulser see page 19 54 DTC 24 Left rear pulser see page 19 54 DTC 31 Right front inlet solenoid see page 19 55 DTC 32 Right front outlet solenoid see page 19 55 DT...

Page 869: ...tom Diagnostic procedure Also check for ABS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting see page 19 67 ABS indicator does not go off and no DTC is stored ABS Indicator Circuit Tro...

Page 870: ...ngine Pulled Below 0 3 V RED Parking brake switch signal running Parking brake Release Battery Voltage 6 BRN F L W Front left wheel negative Detects left front wheel sensor signal 6 7 Wheel Turn wheel...

Page 871: ...econd AC 0 053V or above Reference Oscilloscope 0 15 Vp por above 18 GRY R L W Rear left wheel positive Detects left rear wheel sensor signal 1 7 1 8 Wheel Turn wheel at 1 turn second AC 0 053V or abo...

Page 872: ...nt outlet solenoid valve 4 GND ABS indicator OFF Battery Voltage 5 YEL GRN RL OUT Rear left outlet Drives Ieft rear outlet solenoid valve 5 GND ABS indicator ON Disconnect connector A to turn light on...

Page 873: ...e tires a n d it t h e r e b y e n s u r e s m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y a n d stability of t h e v e h i c l e T h e A B S calculates t h e slip rate of t h e w h e e l s based on t h e v e h i c...

Page 874: ...ion The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high The pressure reduction control has 3...

Page 875: ...S Operation Mode Table Operation Mode Description ABS Indicator Regular operation Operation in normal condition OFF Fail safe mode S The ABS control unit turns the system off when the control unit det...

Page 876: ...aulic circuit is an independent four channel type one channel for each wheel Pressure intensifying mode Inlet valve open outlet valve closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper Pressure...

Page 877: ...O R at HIGH SPEED tu O O at LOW SPEED Wheel Speed and Modulator Control SPEED VEHICLE SPEED REFERENCE VEHICLE SPEED PRESSURE OUTLET VALVE INLET VALVE MOTOR WHEEL SPEED T I M E When the wheel speed dr...

Page 878: ...OR number I 5 6 I 7 1 1 U 1 1 4 5 6 7 12 13 18 18P C O N N E C T O R number 11J12 20P CONNECTOR O number 18P C O N N E C T O R number BRAKE SWITCH C O N N E C T O R 2P CONNECTOR 4P CONNECTOR with crui...

Page 879: ...ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS CONNECTOR A 22P DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1SP 32 WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTOR FRONT REAR CONNECTOR B 12P C S L Wire side of female terminals...

Page 880: ...he ABS control unit and the appropriate wheel sensor B N O G o t o step 4 4 Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel sensor circuit terminal and body ground see table DTC Appropriate Termina...

Page 881: ...wire and the circuit wire between the ABS control unit and the wheel sensor NO Replace the wheel sensor DTC 12 14 16 18 Wheel Sensor Electrical Noise Intermittent Interruption NOTE If the ABS indicato...

Page 882: ...nd test drive the vehicle If the ABS indicator comes on and the same DTC is indicated replace the ABS control unit B DTC 21 22 23 24 Pulser 1 Clear the DTC 2 Test drive the vehicle at 19 mph 30 km h o...

Page 883: ...W H W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity YES Repair short to body ground in the appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the ABS control and the modulator unit B IMO...

Page 884: ...e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 9 Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS control unit connector B 12P solenoid circuit terminal and body ground see table DTC Appropriate Terminal 31 FR I...

Page 885: ...12 RR IN RED WHT Wire side of female terminals Is there resistance OK Y E S G o to step 14 NO Replace the modulator unit B 14 Disconnect the modulator unit connector and remove the jumper wire from th...

Page 886: ...n a l s Is there less than 3 0 YES Replace the modulator unit B NO Check for loose ABS control unit connectors If necessary substitute a known good ABS control unit and recheck DTC 41 42 43 44 Wheel...

Page 887: ...to step 2 2 Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No 3 to No 4 with a jumper wire for a moment and check the fuse P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y C O N N E C T O R B WHT 2 X 4 3 M O T O R W H T...

Page 888: ...ect the pump motor connector 8 Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No 3 to No 4 with a jumper wire 9 Measure the voltage between the pump motor connector terminal No 1 and body ground PUMP...

Page 889: ...the ABS control unit NO If the problem recurs replace the ABS control unit DTC 53 Motor Stuck ON 1 Check that the pump motor operates with the ignition switch OFF Does the pump motor operate YES Repl...

Page 890: ...relay then connect relay terminals No 4 and No 5 together with a jumper wire Does the pump motor run Y E S G o to step 10 NO Replace the pump motor 10 Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B 12P 1...

Page 891: ...round F A I L S A F E R E L A Y C O N N E C T O R f B W H T G R N T e r m i n a l side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 5 Connect the fail safe relay connector terminal No 1 to No 2 with a jumper wir...

Page 892: ...s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there battery voltage YES Repair short to power in the wire between the ABS control unit and the fail safe relay fl N O G o t o step 13 13 Check for conti...

Page 893: ...6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20 i 21 b t 22 F S R Y E L G R N W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity YES If the problem recurs replace the ABS control unit B NO Repair...

Page 894: ...ES Make sure all four tires are the specified size B NO Intermittent failure the vehicle is OK at this time B DTC 81 Centra Processing Unit CPU Diagnosis and ROM RAM Diagnosis 1 Clear the DTC 2 Test d...

Page 895: ...e assembly Is the bulb OK Y E S G o to step 7 N O Replace the ABS indicator bulb 7 Turn the ignition switch OFF 8 Disconnect the gauge assembly 16P connector 9 Check for continuity between the gauge a...

Page 896: ...7 18 19 20 21 22 Wire side of female t e r m i n a l s Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 17 NO Repair open in the wire between the CLOCK 7 5 A fuse and the ABS control unit B 17 Connect the A...

Page 897: ...or equivalent material Removal 1 Disconnect the modulator unit connector C and the pump motor connector B 2 Disconnect the brake lines then remove the modulator unit A Installation 1 Install the modul...

Page 898: ...ontrol unit in the reverse order of removal 1 Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or damaged teeth 2 Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotatin...

Page 899: ...Wheel Sensor Replacement Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting the wires Front 19 71...

Page 900: ......

Page 901: ...authorized Honda dealer To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal collision all SRS service work must be performed by an aut...

Page 902: ...ole Center Console Removal Installation 20 83 Dashboard Instrument Panel Removal Installation 20 84 Driver s Dashboard Lower Cover Removal Installation 20 84 Passenger s Dashboard Lower Cover Removal...

Page 903: ...Trim E m b l e m R e p l a c e m e n t C o u p e 2 0 1 5 9 E m b l e m R e p l a c e m e n t S e d a n 2 0 1 6 0 F r o n t Grille R e p l a c e m e n t C o u p e 2 0 1 6 0 R o o f Drip M o l d i n g R...

Page 904: ...Doors Component Location Index Coupe 20 2...

Page 905: ...L G L A S S R U N C H A N N E L 99 02 m o d e l s G L A S S R U N C H A N N E L 98 m o d e l P O W E R W I N D O W M O T O R STRIKER C Y L I N D E R R O D L A T C H F R O N T L O W E R C H A N N E L...

Page 906: ...T R I P S P E A K E R P U L L P O C K E T T R I M F R O N T D O O R P o s i t i o n A d j u s t m e n t p a g e 20 29 P H I N G E D E T E N T R O D H I N G E D O O R G L A S S I N N E R W E A T H E R...

Page 907: ...6 A d j u s t m e n t p a g e 2 0 2 8 GLASS RUN CHANNEL REGULATOR R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 2 0 1 6 FRONT LOWER CHANNEL OUTER HANDLE R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 2 0 1 1 OUTER HANDLE PROTECTOR P...

Page 908: ...l s D O O R G L A S S O U T E R W E A T H E R S T R I P REAR D O O R W I N D O W E N D I N N E R T R I M 99 02 m o d e l s REAR D O O R S A S H E N D I N N E R T R I M 99 02 m o d e l s S A S H T R I...

Page 909: ...A S S R U N C H A N N E L F R O N T L O W E R C H A N N E L R E G U L A T O R H A N D L E M a n u a l w i n d o w m o d e l O U T E R H A N D L E R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 19 R E G U L A T O R...

Page 910: ...ips A B that hold the door panel C with a commercially available trim pad remover D then remove the door panel by pulling it upward Disconnect the power window switch connectors IE and the power mirro...

Page 911: ...scratch the door panel 1 Pry out the cap B and remove the screw 2 Pull the inner handle forward and out half way 3 Disconnect the inner handle rod C and power door lock switch connector D for some mo...

Page 912: ...w 1 6 Release the clips A B that hold the door panel C with a commercially available trim pad remover D then remove the door panel by pulling it upward Disconnect the security indicator connector E dr...

Page 913: ...osed Front Door Outer Handle Replacement NOTE Put on gloves to protect your hands 1 Raise the glass fully 2 Remove these items Mirror mount cover power mirror see step 2 on page 20 35 manual mirror se...

Page 914: ...separate the lock cylinder A and cylinder switch B F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n S c r e w 1 6 Disconnect the cylinder switch connector A and detach the harness clips B 7 Remove the hole seal A and...

Page 915: ...handle rod Use a shop towel F to protect the opening in the door 11 Replace the bushing G on the outer handle 12 Install the handle in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the c...

Page 916: ...dle rod E cylinder rod F lock rod G and inner handle rod B 5 Install the latch in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in properly and each r...

Page 917: ...A across the regulator B and sector gear C 5 Using a Torx T20 bit remove the screws then separate the power window motor and regulator B F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 3 6 Grease the mov...

Page 918: ...ully raise the glass until you can see the bolts then remove them Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot Take care not to drop the glass inside the door Fastener L o c a t i o n s B o l...

Page 919: ...he position of the glass as necessary see page 20 28 Rear Door Panel Removal Installation Special Tools Required Trim Pad Remover Snap on A177A or equivalent commercially available 1 If applicable rem...

Page 920: ...t A Take care not to scratch the door panel 1 Pry out the cap B and remove the screw 2 Lift out the pull pocket F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n S c r e w 1 Release the clips that hold the door panel A...

Page 921: ...the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass fully closed Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement NOTE Put on gloves to protect your hands 1 Raise the glass fully 2...

Page 922: ...er handle rod B lock rod C and actuator rod D F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 3 6 x 1 0 m m J fo Xf m 4 Ibf ft 6 Remove the bolts securing the outer handle A F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o...

Page 923: ...page 20 4 Outer handle see page 20 19 3 Disconnect the connectors A and actuator rod B then remove the power door lock actuator C 4 Disconnect the lock rod A from the lock crank B 5 Move the latch A...

Page 924: ...properly and each rod is connected securely Make sure the door locks and opens properly Rear Door Glass Quarter Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE Put on gloves to protect your hands 1 Remove these...

Page 925: ...A away from the quarter channel D Pull the sub seal E away as needed glass B and the rear door glass C then carefully and remove the screw F Pull the glass run remove the rear channel out through the...

Page 926: ...r L o c a t i o n s B Bolt 2 C Bolt 2 6 x 1 0 m m 8 N m 0 8 k g f m 6 Ibfft Manual window models F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s B Bolt 2 C Bolt 2 6 x 1 0 m m 8 N m 0 8 kgf m 6 Ibf ft 8 Scribe a li...

Page 927: ...down to see if it moves freely without binding Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed Adjust the position of the glass as necessary see p...

Page 928: ...ustment Coupe NOTE Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or deterioration and replace them if necessary 1 Place the vehicle on a firm level surface 2 Remove these items Mirror mount...

Page 929: ...he glass moves smoothly 9 Raise the glass fully and check for gaps Check that the glass A contacts the glass run channel B evenly 10 Check for water leaks Run water over the roof and on the sealing ar...

Page 930: ...ee page 20 17 Center stiffener front door see page 20 4 Pull pocket bracket Front door see page 20 4 Rear door see page 20 6 Plastic cover Front door see page 20 4 Rear door see page 20 6 3 Carefully...

Page 931: ...heck for equal gaps between the front rear and bottom door edges and the body Check that the door and body edges are parallel Before adjusting replace the mounting bolts 1 Place the vehicle on a firm...

Page 932: ...just the striker A the striker nuts are fixed The striker can be adjusted slightly up or down and in or out 1 Loosen the screws B then insert a shop towel C between the body and striker 2 Lightly tigh...

Page 933: ...Mirrors Component Location index Coupe M I R R O R H O L D E R R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 33 20 31...

Page 934: ...Mirrors Component Location Index Sedan M I R R O R H O L D E R R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 36 M I R R O R H O L D E R R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 36 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 37 20 32...

Page 935: ...the actuator shaft and rubber boot for damage or deterioration and replace them if necessary A 4 Install the mirror holder in the reverse order of removal and note these items Before installing the mi...

Page 936: ...t the mirror mount cover A by hand in the sequence shown 4 While holding the mirror push out the clip A and remove the mirror Take care not to scratch the door A 5 Install the mirror in the reverse or...

Page 937: ...ness clip B then remove the nuts or bolts securing the mirror F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s B o l t 3 5 x 0 8 m m 5 N m 0 5 k g f m 4 I b f f t N u t 3 T y p e B 5 x 0 8 m m 5 N m 0 5 k g f m 4 Ib...

Page 938: ...them apart while removing the adhesive C and detaching the clips D If equipped disconnect the mirror defogger terminals 3 If equipped connect the mirror defogger terminals 4 Reattach the clips of the...

Page 939: ...m of the windshield then detach it from the spring B in the mount C and remove the rearview mirror Take care not to scratch the mirror base D D A 2 If necessary remove the spring from the mount 3 Fit...

Page 940: ...e n t p a g e 20 55 R U B B E R D A M UPPER S P A C E R 2 00 02 m o d e l s W I N D O W A N T E N N A T E R M I N A L C O V E R W I N D O W A N T E N N A T E R M I N A L B A S E R E A R W I N D O W M...

Page 941: ...M O L D I N G U P P E R S P A C E R 2 00 02 models U S Produced U P P E R F A S T E N E R 2 Self adhesive type g l a s s side Required for r e p l a c e m e n t or reinstallation on 99 02 m o d e l s...

Page 942: ...d B If necessary cut the molding with a utility knife 3 Pull down the front portion of the headliner see page 20 79 Take care not to bend the headliner excessively or you may crease or break it 4 Appl...

Page 943: ...from getting on the clean surface 9 If the old windshield is to be reinstalled use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive the fastener the rubber dam and the dashboard seal from the wind...

Page 944: ...primer 3M N 200 or equivalent to the areas between the alignment marks A and glue the adhesive tape B NITTO 501 or equivalent to the edge of the windshield Be careful not to touch the windshield where...

Page 945: ...cont d 20 43...

Page 946: ...i 13 Glue the molding middle upper seal coupe A molding upper seal coupe B molding Corner Seal Sedan C and molding side seal coupe D to the molding E Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhes...

Page 947: ...pening and center it Make alignment marks A across the windshield and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied A 16 Remo...

Page 948: ...er to the molding Do not apply body primer to the windshield and do not get the body and glass primer sponges mixed up Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands If you do the adhesive may not bo...

Page 949: ...before painting the flange W A p p l y b o d y p r i m e r h e r e 19 Before filling a cartridge cut a V in the end of the nozzle A as shown 10 m m 0 39 in 7 m m 0 27 in 20 Pack adhesive into the cart...

Page 950: ...owel dampened with alcohol 23 Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour then spray water over the windshield and check for leaks Mark leaking areas and let the windshield dry then seal with sealant Let...

Page 951: ...s Rear bulkhead cover Center anchor bolt of the center belt Center belt cover High mount brake light Lock cylinder trim Rear shelf Coupe see page 20 76 Rear bulkhead cover Rear shelf Coupe see page 20...

Page 952: ...dow 11 With a putty knife scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm 0 08 in on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange Do not scrape down to the painted surf...

Page 953: ...U S Produced models A p p l y p r i m e r here F a s t e n e r a n d s p a c e r L o c a t i o n s B t F a s t e n e r C o u p e 2 both sides S e d a n 3 both s i d e s a n d center C S p a c e r 2 1...

Page 954: ...al A to the molding B Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied 18 Install the upper fasteners A Japan Produced models Glue the lower fasteners B to the body as shown Alig...

Page 955: ...urfaces with your hands If you do the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly causing a leak after the rear window is installed Keep water dust and abrasive materials away from the primed su...

Page 956: ...n or close the doors until the adhesive is dry A 26 Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window use a soft shop towe...

Page 957: ...er Quarter trim panel 4 From inside the vehicle use a knife A to cut through the quarter glass adhesive B all the way around If the quarter glass C is to be reinstalled take care not to damage the mol...

Page 958: ...on the glass surface 8 If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled use a putty knife to scrape off all traces of old adhesive from the quarter glass Scrape the old adhesive from the molding with a k...

Page 959: ...arter glass 12 With a sponge apply a light coat of glass primer to the inside face of the quarter glass A as shown then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth Do not apply body primer to the qu...

Page 960: ...flange A p p l y b o d y primer h e r e 28 m m 1 1 in 3 5 m m 1 4 in 14 Before filling a cartridge cut a V in the end of the nozzle A as shown 7 m m 0 27 in 15 Pack adhesive into the cartridge withou...

Page 961: ...ay water over the quarter glass and check for leaks Mark the leaking areas and let the quarter glass dry then seal with sealant Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after quarter glass installat...

Page 962: ...g h t A d j u s t m e n t p a g e 20 62 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 62 C l o s i n g Force a n d O p e n i n g D r a g Check p a g e 2 0 7 1 D R A I N C H A N N E L R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e...

Page 963: ...a loose motor 2 Check for a worn gear or bearing 3 Check for a deformed cable assembly Glass does not move but motor turns 1 Check for a defective gear or inner cable 2 Check for foreign material stu...

Page 964: ...x 1 0 m m 9 N m 0 9 k g f m 7 Ibfft 3 Repeat on opposite side if necessary Glass Replacement 1 Tilt the glass all the way up 2 Slide the sunshade all the way back 3 Remove the caps A and screws then...

Page 965: ...the drain channel B F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 2 4 Remove the drain channel A A 5 Install the drain channel in the reverse order of removal and note these items Push the drain channel...

Page 966: ...le lifting the front portion of the sunshade A move the sunshade forward until you can see both Glass see page 20 62 sunshade rear hooks B Do not damage the Drain channel see page 20 63 sunshade and h...

Page 967: ...r water leaks Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle Do not use a high pressure spray Motor Replacement 1 Remove the headliner see page 20 79 2 Put on gloves to protect your hands Disco...

Page 968: ...n e r L o c a t i o n s 3 Remove the ceiling light harness D by detaching the harness clips E and remove the harness cushion F 4 With an assistant holding the frame G remove the bolts and release the...

Page 969: ...im panel and pull the drain tube down out of the pillar 8 Install the frame and drain tubes in the reverse order of removal and note these items Before installing the frame clear the drain tubes and d...

Page 970: ...e the slide stops A cable tube rear brackets B cable tube side bracket mounting bolts C and the cable tube mounting screws D from both sides of the frame E F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s C Bolt 2 6...

Page 971: ...sliders and cables in the reverse order of removal and note these items Damaged parts should be replaced Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket A and guide rail portion of the frame B indicat...

Page 972: ...2 Ibfft 3 With an open end wrench loosen the position switch mounting bolts C 4 Adjust the position switch D Move the switch a little at a time then secure it at the position where you hear a faint c...

Page 973: ...fort required to open the glass using a spring scale B as shown 5 If the load is over 40 N 4 kgf 9 Ibf check these items The side clearance and glass height adjustment see page 20 62 For broken or dam...

Page 974: ...Interior Trim Component Location Index Coupe R E A R S H E L F p a g e 2 0 7 6 20 72...

Page 975: ...g e 2 0 7 5 H E A D L I N E R R e m o v a l I n s t a l l a t i o n p a g e 20 79 F R O N T PILLAR T R I M p a g e 20 75 KICK P A N E L p a g e 20 75 F R O N T D O O R SILL T R I M p a g e 20 75 C A...

Page 976: ...note these items Replace any damage clips Apply liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before installation Before installing the anchor bolts make sure there are no twists or kin...

Page 977: ...ratch the trim and panels Remove the trim as shown Install the trim in the reverse order of removal and note these items Replace any damage clips Apply liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper...

Page 978: ...s A Clip 4 B Clip 1 C Clip 2 Q U A R T E R T R I M P A N E L R E A R S H E L F R E A R S H E L F R e m o v e t h e f o l l o w i n g p a r t s Rear side t r i m p a n e l C h i l d seat t e t h e r a...

Page 979: ...H T D O O R O P E N I N G T R I M R E A R O P E N I N G D O O R T R I M R E A R S H E L F R e m o v e t h e c h i l d seat t e t h e r a n c h o r s 00 02 m o d e l s HIGH M O U N T B R A K E L I G H...

Page 980: ...p it with protective tape to prevent damage Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels Remove the trim as shown Install the t r i m in the reverse order of removel and replace any damaged cl...

Page 981: ...t side Rear seat belt upper anchor bolt Quarter trim panel 3 Remove the rear window antenna terminal cover see step 4 on page 20 49 4 Remove the sunvisor A and holder B from each side Disconnect the v...

Page 982: ...t e n e r L o c a t i o n s O C l i p 3 Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal and note these items When reinstalling the headliner through the door opening be careful not to fold or be...

Page 983: ...ger s dashboard lower cover see page 20 85 Center console see page 20 83 Rear seat cushion Coupe see page 20 128 Sedan see page 20 129 Front seat belt lower anchor bolt both sides Coupe see step 8 on...

Page 984: ...F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s A Clip 2 B O Clip 1 C Clip 2 i Till a i Sedan F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s A Clip 3 B p Clip 1 6 Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal and note thes...

Page 985: ...i o n s S c r e w 8 A Clip 4 B Clip 2 C Clip 2 r I h D Clip 7 S H I F T I N D I C A T O R T R I M R I N G A T B E V E R A G E H O L D E R Carefully pry here Do not pull on lid to remove C O N S O L E...

Page 986: ...removal Driver s Dashboard Lower Cover Removal Installation SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations see page 23 23 and precautions and procedures see page 23 28 in t...

Page 987: ...reverse order of removal Passenger s Dashboard Lower Cover Removal Installation NOTE When prying with a flat tip screwdriver wrap it with protective tape and apply protective tape around the related...

Page 988: ...the lower cover 5 Install the lower cover in the reverse order of removal Center Panel Removal Installation NOTE When prying with a flat tip screwdriver wrap it with protective tape and apply protect...

Page 989: ...properly Glove Box Removal Installation SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations see page 23 23 and precautions and procedures see page 23 28 in the SRS section befor...

Page 990: ...Vent Removal Installation 1 Remove the coin pocket A then remove the screws from under the coin pocket F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 2 Clip 2 A 2 Wrap a flat tip screwdriver with protect...

Page 991: ...e hook portions of the vent first then push the clip portions into place securely Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal and Installation 1 Wrap a flat tip screwdriver with protective tape and apply protecti...

Page 992: ...Center console see page 20 83 Glove box see page 20 87 Door opening trim both sides as necessary Coupe see page 20 74 Front door opening trim both sides as necessary Sedan see page 20 75 Front pillar...

Page 993: ...r D evaporator temperature sensor connector E and antenna lead F On 00 model Sedan and 01 02 models disconnect the dashboard wire harness connector s G Detach the ECM PCM and the antenna lead harness...

Page 994: ...ger s door disconnect the side wire harness connector A cabin wire harness connectors B roof wire harness connector C and the door wire harness connectors D from the right passenger s fuse box E Disco...

Page 995: ...dashboard through the front door opening 13 Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins correctly Before tightening the...

Page 996: ...nnector holder B and disconnect the connector Detach the harness clips C and remove the ground bolts D C C A 6 x 1 0 m m 9 8 N m 1 0 k g f m 7 2 Ibf ft 4 From the driver s side if applicable disconnec...

Page 997: ...ire harness connectors D E F from the connector holder G the steering hanger beam H and the driver s under dash fuse relay box B Detach the harness clip I and remove the ground bolt J 7 Remove the scr...

Page 998: ...ard A and steering hanger beam B 9 Install the steering hanger beam in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the dashboard wire harness C and steering hanger beam wire harness D...

Page 999: ...P o w e r S e a t w i t h Side A i r b a g p a g e 20 111 8 w a y P o w e r Seat w i t h o u t S i d e A i r b a g p a g e 20 112 8 w a y P o w e r S e a t w i t h S i d e A i r b a g p a g e 20 113 S...

Page 1000: ...out S i d e A i r b a g page 20 110 2 way P o w e r S e a t with S i d e A i r b a g page 20 111 8 way P o w e r A d j u s t a b l e S e a t p a g e 20 114 S e a t Wiring H a r n e s s Installation p...

Page 1001: ...he battery and wait at leasts 3 minutes before beginning work 2 Remove the seat track end covers A and remove the bolts securing the front seat B When prying with a flat tip screwdriver wrap it with p...

Page 1002: ...s seat on Coupe with side airbag Manual seat 01 02 models passenger s seat on Coupe with side airbag A T o b o d y Manual height adjustable seat 98 00 models and 01 02 models without side airbag Manua...

Page 1003: ...99 models 5 Install the seat in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the seat harness connector is plugged in properly 00 02 models Enter the anti theft code for the radio then...

Page 1004: ...l y m u l t i p u r p o s e grease t o t h e m o v i n g p o r t i o n of t h e seat track T o p r e v e n t w r i n k l e s in t h e seat back cover stretch t h e m a t e r i a l e v e n l y o v e r...

Page 1005: ...r are installed correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover stretch the material evenly over the pad Replace the back panel c...

Page 1006: ...t belt switch harness Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly and note these items Route the seat wire harness correctly see page 20 118 Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are inst...

Page 1007: ...ase to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover stretch the material evenly over the pad Replace the back panel clips with new ones If the seat back pad or the O...

Page 1008: ...y multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover stretch the material evenly over the pad H E A D R E S T 98 00 m o d e l s H O O K S E A T B A...

Page 1009: ...20 115 Route the connecting cable correctly see page 20 115 Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent...

Page 1010: ...reverse order of disassembly and note these items Route the seat wire harness correctly see page 20 118 Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the...

Page 1011: ...SRS section before performing repairs or service Disassemble the front seat as shown Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly and note these items Route the seat wire harness correctly...

Page 1012: ...ems Route the seat wire harness correctly Coupe see page 20 115 Sedan see page 20 118 Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of...

Page 1013: ...20 115 Sedan see page 20 118 Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover...

Page 1014: ...multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover stretch the material evenly over the pad Replace the back panel clips with new ones S E A T B A...

Page 1015: ...Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover stretch the material evenly...

Page 1016: ...alled correctly Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track To prevent wrinkles in the seat back cover stretch the material evenly over the pad Replace the back panel clips with...

Page 1017: ...odels F OPDS unit harness 00 02 models G connectors H clips I and wire ties J are fastened correctly Manual seat 98 99 model passenger s seat with seat heater f T o recline adjuster Manual seat 00 mod...

Page 1018: ...B J T o s e a t belt b u c k l e Manual height adjustable seat 01 02 models with side airbag T o s e a t belt buckle 2 way power seat 98 00 models H T o p o w e r s e a t s w i t c h T o s e a t belt...

Page 1019: ...s e a t belt b u c k l e H E J T o s e a t c u s h i o n T o s e a t b a c k heater heater 8 way power seat 00 model with seat heater T o recline adjuster 8 way power seat 01 02 models with seat heate...

Page 1020: ...2 models D OPDS unit harness 00 02 models E connectors F clips G and wire ties H are fastened correctly Manual seat driver s seat buckle Manual seat 98 99 models passenger s seat with seat heater T o...

Page 1021: ...Manual height adjustable seat without side airbag buckle Manual height adjustable seat 01 02 models with side airbag 2 way power seat 98 00 models B buckle 2 way power seat 01 02 models cont d 20 119...

Page 1022: ...H B F G heater Front Seat Torsion Bar Replacement Manual Height Adjustable NOTE Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers 1 Remove the front seat see page 20 99 2 Put on gloves to prot...

Page 1023: ...eight Put on gloves to protect your hands Disassemble the front seat linkage as shown Reassemble the seat linkage in the reverse order of disassembly and note these items Replace the bushings with new...

Page 1024: ...ge as shown Reassemble the seat linkage in the reverse order of disassembly and note these items For the power height seat replace the bushings with new ones Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding a...

Page 1025: ...2 models Do not repair any tears or frayed spots of the seat back cover If necessary replace the seat back cover Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers With side airbag 00 02 models...

Page 1026: ...ck panel release the hook strip A and fold back the seat back cover B 7 Release all of the inside springs A then fold back the seat back cover B and release the hook strip C Without back panel 98 00 m...

Page 1027: ...to release in step 7 release all of the clips from the locations which are showed as inside spring portions in this illustration 9 Lift and pull out the release button A and remove the screw B then r...

Page 1028: ...ide springs 00 02 models On some type seats with side airbag replace the clips A with new ones using commercially available upholstery ring pliers B Use only original Honda replacement seat back cover...

Page 1029: ...to remove Except leather seat cover 98 00 models A B Except leather seat cover 01 02 models 5 Install the cover in the reverse order of removal and note these items To prevent wrinkles when installing...

Page 1030: ...the rear seat belts and center belt When installing the seat cushion slip the seat belt buckles through the openings in the seat cushion Make sure the seat back locks securely F a s t e n e r L o c a...

Page 1031: ...l and note these items Before attaching the rear seat back and cushion make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belts and center belt When installing the seat cushion slip the seat belt...

Page 1032: ...haft B from the collar C on the passenger s side of the vehicle by pulling up on the armrest and remove the pivot shaft B from the collar D by pulling up on the armrest A Cover Replacement Sedan 3 Rem...

Page 1033: ...ver using a small screwdriver press the inside hook A down through the access hole B 3 While pressing the hook pry the trunk handle C up with a flat tip screwdriver 4 Remove the trunk handle A and rea...

Page 1034: ...igh mount brake light Lock cylinder trim Rear shelf 3 Remove these items see page 20 74 Door sill trim both sides and rear side trim panel 4 Disconnect the cylinder rods A from the seat back latch B o...

Page 1035: ...When prying with a flat tip screwdriver wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim 1 Remove the seat side bolsters both sides see page 20 129 2...

Page 1036: ...20 128 2 Remove the screws then remove the center belt guide from right seat back F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 2 3 Remove the clips and pull the seat back mat A back then separate the l...

Page 1037: ...sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks and clips Replace the released clips with new ones Rear Seat back Cover Replacement Sedan NOTE Take care not to tear the s...

Page 1038: ...ull back the seat back mat With armrest F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s t C l i p 6 Without armrest F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s P C l i p 8 A A V V 5 Release all the clips A and hook strips B...

Page 1039: ...nkles when installing a seat back cover make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the fasteners hooks and clips Replace the released clips with new ones Rear Seat Side Bo...

Page 1040: ...r of removal 20 128 and note these items 2 Release all the clips A from under the seat To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion and fold back the seat cushion cover cushion cover make sure t...

Page 1041: ...l the way around and release the clips A and fasteners B then remove the seat cushion cover On a leather seat cover there are no fasteners B 4 Install the cover in the reverse order of removal and not...

Page 1042: ...nt bumper and body Put on gloves to protect your hands Remove the front bumper as shown Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the front bumper engages the s...

Page 1043: ...nds Remove the front bumper as shown Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips and the hooks of the corner upper beams o...

Page 1044: ...ont bumper as shown Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal and note these items After reinstalling the center upper beam check the aim of the headlights see page 22 98 Make sure the front...

Page 1045: ...F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s A Bolt 6 B B o l t 4 C Bolt 6 F R O N T B U M P E R B E A M cont d 20 143...

Page 1046: ...these items After reinstalling the center upper beam check the aim of the headlights see page 22 98 Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips and the hooks of the center and corner upper beams...

Page 1047: ...es to protect your hands Remove the rear bumper as shown Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the rear bumper engages the side clips and the hooks under th...

Page 1048: ...Bumpers Rear Bumper Removal Installation Coupe cont d F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s Nut 4 LEFT A B S O R B E R 20 146...

Page 1049: ...under the taillight on each side securely Replace any damaged clips F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s A S c r e w 2 A Clip 7 C L I P H O O K S R E A R B U M P E R L I C E N S E P L A T E L I G H T C O...

Page 1050: ...gloves to protect your hands Remove the rear bumper as shown Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the rear bumper engages the side clips and the hooks und...

Page 1051: ...Fastener Locations Nut 4 ABSORBER BOX 20 149...

Page 1052: ...as shown Install the hood in the reverse order of removal and note these items Make sure the windshield washer tubes are connected properly Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely Adjust...

Page 1053: ...and rearward by using the elongated holes on the hood hinge A Turn the hood edge cushions B as necessary to make the hood fit flush with the body at front and side edges Adjust the hood latch C to ob...

Page 1054: ...are not to scratch the hood 1 Remove the hood insulator A 1 Disconnect the windshield washer tubes B from the windshield washer nozzles C 2 Release the windshield washer tube from the clips D 3 Using...

Page 1055: ...in Fastener Locations C C l i p 12 D Clip 9 98 99 models Replacement Sedan Fastener Locations C Clip 12 D l Clip 7 A 2 Install the hood seal and hood molding in the reverse order of removal and note t...

Page 1056: ...s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s 2 Disconnect the taillight connectors A license plate light connector B trunk lid latch actuator connector C trunk lid cylinder switch connector D and remove trunk lid op...

Page 1057: ...hese items M a k e sure t h e connectors are p l u g g e d in p r o p e r l y a n d o p e n e r cable is c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r l y a n d t h e w i r e harness a n d o p e n e r cable are r o u...

Page 1058: ...orward and rearward by using the elongated holes Take care not to hit the rear window when loosening the bolts B Turn the trunk lid edge cushions in or out C as necessary to make the trunk lid fit flu...

Page 1059: ...lid hinges First remove the right torsion bar B and then remove the left torsion bar C 3 Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body 4 Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal an...

Page 1060: ...nt 1 Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip by pulling it off 2 Apply sealant Cemedine P N 08712 0004 or equivalent A in the groove of the trunk lid weatherstrip B in the areas indicated by arrows 3 Locate...

Page 1061: ...oupe 1 Clean the trunk lid surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol After cleaning keep oil grease and water from getting on the surface 2 Apply the emblem where shown A C C O R D E M B L E M E d g e...

Page 1062: ...n A C C O R D E M B L E M 15 0 59 117 0 67 17 0 67 E d g e o f t h e t r u n k l i d Unit m m in V E R S I O N E M B L E M S P E C I A L E D I T I O N 00 m o d e l E d g e of t h e t r u n k l i d Fro...

Page 1063: ...1 Detach the moldings from each clip then remove the roof drip molding A from the quarter glass molding B Take care not to scratch the body F a s t e n e r l o c a t i o n s D Clip 9 B A 2 Install the...

Page 1064: ...B as an assembly Take care not to scratch the body F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s C D Clip 10 D t Clip 1 E f C l i p 1 F O Clip 1 2 Separate the roof drip molding and rear pillar molding 3 Install...

Page 1065: ...d slide the roof molding to release the front bracket D from the pin E 3 Pull up the front portion of roof molding 4 Pull up and release the rear bracket A from the pin B then remove the roof molding...

Page 1066: ...lips from inside the vehicle To remove the front door molding remove the front door panel see page 20 9 and plastic cover To remove the rear door molding remove the rear door panel see page 20 17 and...

Page 1067: ...s E will stay in the body 4 Remove the side clips from the body F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 4 C C l i p 4 E t C l i p 12 2 Replace any damaged clips 3 Install the side clips on the sid...

Page 1068: ...remove it Side clips E will stay in the body 4 Remove the side clips from the body Fastener Locations Screw 4 C Clip 4 E p Clip 9 2 Replace any damaged clips 3 Install the side clips on the side sill...

Page 1069: ...2 C Clip 7 D Clip 3 E x c e p t 0 1 0 2 m o d e l s C o u p e S P L A S H G U A R D For s o m e m o d e l s 1 Remove the fuel pipe protector as shown Take care to scratch the body F a s t e n e r L o...

Page 1070: ...ear bumper Coupe see page 20 145 Sedan see page 20 148 2 Remove the screws then remove the rear air outlet A Take care not to scratch the body F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s S c r e w 2 3 Install t...

Page 1071: ...Openers Component Location Index HOOD RELEASE H A N D L E R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 2 0 1 7 5 20 169...

Page 1072: ...dan see page 20 75 Door opening trim Kick panel 3 Disconnect the hood opener cable A from the hood latch B see page 20 175 and hood release handle C see step 2 on page 20 175 F a s t e n e r L o c a t...

Page 1073: ...76 Front seat belt lower anchor bolt left side see step 8 on page 23 6 3 Remove these items see page 20 74 Door sill trim left side Rear side trim panel 4 Remove these items see page 20 78 Trunk floor...

Page 1074: ...To opener cable junction box Without power trunk lid lock Fastener Locations C t Clip 4 D t Clip E t Cable cushion 98 00 models 1 01 02 models 1 _ To opener cable junction box 9 Using a clip remover d...

Page 1075: ...left side see step 6 on page 23 7 3 Remove these items see page 20 75 Front door sill trim left side Rear door sill trim left side Center pillar lower trim panel 4 Remove these items see page 20 78 Tr...

Page 1076: ...id lock trunk lid latch B see page 20 178 F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s With power trunk lid lock C Clip 3 junction box t R e t m n k j d h j n g e 10 Remove the trunk lid opener fuel fill door op...

Page 1077: ...s then remove the hood release handle 4 Install the handle in the reverse order of removal and note there items Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly Make sure the hood opens properly...

Page 1078: ...properly Adjust the hood latch alignment see page 20 151 Make sure the hood locks securely Trunk Lid Opener Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement 1 Using a flat tip screwdriver wrapped with protective ta...

Page 1079: ...opener cable is connected properly Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement 1 Remove the following items see page 20 78 Trunk floor Trunk rear trim pa...

Page 1080: ...i o n s Bolt 2 _ 6 x 1 0 m m Trunk Lid Latch Replacement 1 Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder see page 20 179 2 Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable A and trunk lid latch switch conne...

Page 1081: ...roperly and the cylinder rod is connected properly Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement 1 Disconnect the cylinder rod A and cylinder switch con...

Page 1082: ...Frame Sub frame Replacement After loosening the sub frame mounting bolts be sure to replace them with new ones R e p l a c e 20 180...

Page 1083: ...S U B F R A M E 14 x 1 5 m m 103 N m 10 5 k g f m 7 6 Ibf ft Replace 20 181...

Page 1084: ...Frame Frame Repair Chart Top V i e w U n i t m m in 0 I n n e r d i a m e t e r POINT h POINT g CENTER LINE POINT b2 POINT b3 238 9 37 268 10 6 361 14 2 490 19 3 595 23 4 610 24 0 1425 56 10 20 182...

Page 1085: ......

Page 1086: ...Frame Frame Repair Chart cont d Side View 20 184...

Page 1087: ...SECTION DO 025 1 0 Locate Hole POINT t 017 0 7 Rear Suspension Sub frame 20 185...

Page 1088: ...authorized Honda dealer To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal collision all SRS service work must be performed by an aut...

Page 1089: ...and Pollen Filter Replacement 21 25 Blower Unit Removal and Installation 21 26 Blower Unit Components Replacement 21 27 Heater Unit Core Replacement 21 28 Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 21 30 Air Cond...

Page 1090: ...HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Special Tools ReiNo Tool Number Description 07SAZ 001000A Backprobe Set 2 I 21 2...

Page 1091: ...R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n p a g e 21 26 B L O W E R U N I T C O M P O N E N T S R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 21 27 B L O W E R R E S I S T O R D U S T A N D P O L L E N FILTER R e p...

Page 1092: ...2 seconds then it will blink the Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC to indicate a faulty component R E C I R C U L A T I O N I N D I C A T O R i i i 1 T q r GD GD CD F A N S W I T C H R E C I R C U L A T I O...

Page 1093: ...r mix control motor circuit see page 21 9 2 A problem in the mode control motor circuit see page 21 10 3 With A C A problem in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit see page 21 12 In case of multi...

Page 1094: ...s under dash fuse relay box Poor ground at G202 and G401 Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors Blower motor does not run at all Blower Motor Circuit Troubleshooting see page 21 15 Blown fuse No...

Page 1095: ...N A C PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT 6 BLU GRN MODE 4 OUTPUT 7 LT GRN BLK MODE 3 OUTPUT 8 GRN YEL MODE 2 OUTPUT 9 BLK GROUND OUTPUT 10 RED BLK COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY INPUT 11 GRN RED FRESH...

Page 1096: ...FUSE RELAY B O X IGNITION SWITCH DRIVER S U N D E R D A S H FUSE RELAY BOX AC PRESSURE SWITCH With A CI REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT I...

Page 1097: ...22 R E D Y E L R E D W H T Y E L G R N J P N K B L K 5 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check the same terminals for voltage H E A T E R C O N T R O L P A N E L 22P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e...

Page 1098: ...and the air mix control motor 8 Remove the air mix control motor see page 21 20 9 Check the air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement Do the air mix control linkage and door move smoothly...

Page 1099: ...7P connector 22P No 6 No 7 No 8 No 14 No 15 No 17 No 18 7P No 3 No 4 No 5 No 2 No 1 No 7 No 6 H E A T E R C O N T R O L P A N E L 2 2 P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a...

Page 1100: ...r circuit 1 Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector 2 Measure the resistance between the No 1 and No 2 terminals of the evaporator temperature sensor E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R...

Page 1101: ...o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity 6 Check for continuity between the No 17 terminal of the heater control panel 22P connector and the No 1 terminal of the evaporator temperature se...

Page 1102: ...o step 12 7 Disconnect the heater control panel 22P connector 8 Check for continuity between the No 1 and No 11 terminals of the heater control panel 22P connector and body ground individually H E A...

Page 1103: ...on control motor see page 21 22 13 Check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement Do the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly YES Replace the recirculation cont...

Page 1104: ...SWITCH 7P CONNECTOR W i r e side of female terminals B L U I Z I B L U R E D B L U B L K B L U Y E L Does the blower motor run at progressively higher speeds YES Replace the heater fan switch NO Repai...

Page 1105: ...25 Turn the ignition switch OFF 26 Check for continuity between the No 1 terminal of the heater fan switch 7P connector and body ground H E A T E R F A N S W I T C H 7 P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i...

Page 1106: ...voltage between the No 1 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4 P S O C K E T 1 B L K Y E L Is there battery voltage Y E S G o to step 35 NO Rep...

Page 1107: ...gnition switch OFF 6 Measure the voltage between the No 3 terminal of the heater control panel 22P connector and body ground HEATER CONTROL PANEL 22P CONNECTOR Wire side of f e m a l e terminals 1 2 3...

Page 1108: ...nkage and door move smoothly replace the air mix control motor If the linkage or door sticks or binds repair them as needed A I R M I X C O N T R O L M O T O R 3 Measure the resistance between the No...

Page 1109: ...continuity between the No 3 4 5 6 terminals and the No 7 terminal individually There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal Mode Control Motor Replacement 1 Remove the wire harness clip A...

Page 1110: ...or Recirculate Don t cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L M O T O R Recirculation Control Motor Replacement 1 Remove the glove box see page 20...

Page 1111: ...ator Temperature Sensor Test 1 Dip the sensor in ice water and measure the resistance between its terminals EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 2 Then p...

Page 1112: ...emperature control dial B then remove the front panel C Remove the mode control switch D recirculation control switch E rear defogger switch F and A C switch lid G or A C switch H buttons 2 Reassemble...

Page 1113: ...ove the glove box see page 20 87 2 Remove the bolt the screws and the glove box frame 3 Remove the filter lid A from the evaporator then pull out the lower dust and pollen filter B and the upper dust...

Page 1114: ...r see page 21 46 5 Without air conditioning remove the self tapping screws the moutning nut the mounting bolts and the heater duct 6 x 1 0 m m 9 8 N m 1 0 k g f m 7 2 Ibfft 6 Disconnect the connectors...

Page 1115: ...rol motor A the blower resistor B and the blower motor C can be replaced without removing the blower unit Before reassembly make sure that the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly wit...

Page 1116: ...r valve arm to the fully opened position as shown C B 4 When the engine is cool drain the engine coolant from the radiator see page 10 10 5 Remove the heater valve mounting nut Slide the hose clamps A...

Page 1117: ...Install the heater core in the reverse order of removal 12 Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal and note these items Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses and instal...

Page 1118: ...Cool 60 F or 18 C with the ignition switch ON II 4 Attach the heater valve cable B to the air mix control linkage C as shown above Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop D the...

Page 1119: ...Air Conditioning Component Location Index S E R V I C E V A L V E L O W P R E S S U R E SIDE C O N D E N S E R R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 21 53 21 31...

Page 1120: ...ly don t remove the caps or plugs until just before you reconnect each line Before connecting any hose or line apply a few drops of refrigerant oil to the O ring When tightening or loosening a fitting...

Page 1121: ...1 0 kgf m 7 2 lbf ft D R e c e i v e r line t o t h e r e c e i v e r d r y e r 9 8 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 2 Ibf ft Receiver line t o t h e e v a p o r a t o r 13 N m 1 3 kgf m 9 4 Ibf ft S u c t i o n h o...

Page 1122: ...er Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting see page 21 38 Blown fuse No 57 20A and No 58 20A in the under hood fuse relay box and No 3 7 5A in the driver s under dash fuse relay box Poor ground atG201 Cle...

Page 1123: ...IEF VALVE Relieves p r e s s u r e at t h e c o m p r e s s o r w h e n t h e p r e s s u r e is t o o h i g h COMPRESSOR S u c t i o n a n d c o m p r e s s i o n HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR HIGH PRESSURE LI...

Page 1124: ...Air Conditioning Circuit Diagram U N D E R H O O D F U S E R E L A Y B O X I G N I T I O N S W I T C H D R I V E R S U N D E R D A S H FUSE RELAY B O X BATTERY G201 G101 G201 XL G401 21 36...

Page 1125: ...NO Replace the under hood fuse relay box I 4 Connect the No 1 and No 2 terminals of the condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T 1 2 2 BLU YEL...

Page 1126: ...condenser fan motor NO Check for an open in the wire between the condenser fan and body ground If the wire is OK check for poor ground at G201 B Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshoot...

Page 1127: ...heck the No 58 20A fuse in the under hood fuse relay box and the No 3 7 5A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box Are the fuses OK Y E S G o to step 2 NO Replace the fuse s and recheck B 2 Che...

Page 1128: ...dash fuse relay box and the compressor clutch relay 9 Turn the ignition switch OFF 10 Reinstall the compressor clutch relay 11 Make sure the A C switch is OFF 12 Turn the ignition switch ON II 13 Usi...

Page 1129: ...compressor clutch relay and the compressor clutch A C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting 1 Disconnect the A C pressure switch 2P connector 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II 3 Measure the voltage...

Page 1130: ...tom indication goes away replace the original heater control p a n e l NO Repair open in the wire between the heater control panel and the A C pressure switch 10 Using a Backprobe Set measure the volt...

Page 1131: ...sure abnormally low Expansion valve is frosted Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace Suction flow pressure abnormally low Receiver dryer outlet is cool a n d inlet is w a r m should be w a r m d u...

Page 1132: ...systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers 1 Connect a R 134a re...

Page 1133: ...umidity Mark a point 10 above and 10 below the humidity level From each point draw a horizontal line across the delivery temperature The delivery temperature should fall between the two lines Complete...

Page 1134: ...then remove the self tapping screws the mounting nut the mounting bolts and the evaporator B 6 x 1 0 m m 9 8 N m 1 0 k g f m 7 2 Ibfft 6 Install the evaporator in the reverse order of removal and note...

Page 1135: ...d so you can use it to hold the valve while you loosen the second fitting 5 Reassemble the evaporator in the reverse order of disassembly and note these items Replace all O rings with new ones at each...

Page 1136: ...ery recycling charging station see page 21 54 5 Loosen the A C compressor belt see page 4 39 6 Remove the nuts then disconnect the suction line A and discharge line B from the compressor Plug or cap t...

Page 1137: ...ght O rings for HFC 134a R 134a to avoid leakage Use refrigerant oil DENSO ND OIL8 for HFC 134a DENSO piston type compressors only To avoid contamination do not return the oil to the container once di...

Page 1138: ...ck the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating Field Coil Resistamce 3 4 3 8 ohms at 68 F 20 C the pulley by hand Replace the clutch set with a 3 Measure the clearance between the pulley A and the pr...

Page 1139: ...older 13 2 N m 1 35 k g f m 9 76 Ibf ft t 3 If you are replacing the field coil remove the snap ring A with snap ring pliers then remove the pulley B Be careful not to damage the pulley and compressor...

Page 1140: ...note the installation direction and make sure they are fully seated in the groove Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it s reassembled Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be dam...

Page 1141: ...fting it up Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when removing the condenser A 6 x 1 0 m m 9 8 N m 1 0 k g f m 7 2 Ibfft Install the condenser in the reverse order of removal and n...

Page 1142: ...l system discharge occurs ventilate work area before resuming service Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers 1 Connect a R 134a refri...

Page 1143: ...manufacturers 1 When an A C System has been opened to the atmosphere such as during installation or repair it must be evacuated using a R 134a refrigerant recovery recycling charging station If the sy...

Page 1144: ...1 Connect a R 134a refrigerant recovery recycling charging station A to the high pressure service port B and the low pressure service port C as shown following the equipment manufacturer s instructio...

Page 1145: ...itioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lulbricant manufacturers HQ 1 Connec...

Page 1146: ...an authorized Honda dealer To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal collision all S R S service work must be performed by an...

Page 1147: ...ocation Index 22 130 Circuit Diagram 22 131 Horn Test Replacement 22 131 Accessory P o w e r Socket Circuit Diagram 22 132 Test Replacement 22 133 M u l t i p l e x C o n t r o l S y s t e m C o m p o...

Page 1148: ...Body Electrical Special Tools Ret No Tool Number Description Qty 07LAJ PT3020A Test Harness 1 07WAZ 001010A MPCS Short Switch 1 22 2...

Page 1149: ...g Connectors Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with grease except watertight connectors All connectors have push down...

Page 1150: ...cure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations Remove clips carefully don t damage their locks A Slip pliers A underthe clip base and through th...

Page 1151: ...at no wires are pinched under them When using electrical test equipment follow the manufacturer s instructions and those described in this manual If possible insert the probe of the tester from the wi...

Page 1152: ...ou made in step 2 Keep in mind that a logical simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting Test for the most likely cause of failure first Try to make tests at points that are easily acces...

Page 1153: ...l o r s Y E L R E D B R N B L K W H T B L U a n d W H T M U L T I R E L A Y B O X B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y A C C O M P R E S S...

Page 1154: ...O O F C L O S E R E L A Y W i r e c o l o r s W H T Y E L BLK 1 L G R N R E D G R N and G R N R E D J D A Y T I M E R U N N I N G L I G H T S C O N T R O L U N I T C a n a d a M U L T I P L E X C O N...

Page 1155: ...C A L I F O R N I A H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R R E L A Y W i r e c o l o r s G R N R E D B L K Y E L W H T a n d R E D B L U 22 9...

Page 1156: ...Relay and Control Unit Locations Door and Seat FRONT PASSENGER S SEAT 22 10...

Page 1157: ...rness B right branch C201 t h r o u g h C203 and C403 see page 22 20 Dashboard w i r e harness A C204 C302 and C401 G501 and G502 C501 t h r o u g h C505 and C582 G503 and G504 see page 22 22 Left sid...

Page 1158: ...Cable Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes T3 6 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Transmission housing G1 1 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n...

Page 1159: ...22 13...

Page 1160: ...l injector N o 3 20 2 M i d d l e of engine Fuel injector N o 4 21 2 M i d d l e of e n g i n e Engine oil pressure switch 11 1 M i d d l e of e n g i n e PCM ECM connector B 4 25 Under m i d d l e of...

Page 1161: ...22 15...

Page 1162: ...Canada Secondary heated o x y g e n sensor 21 4 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Secondary H 0 2 S Security h o o d switch 25 2 U n d e r hood latch Taillight relay 3 4 B e h i n d right kic...

Page 1163: ...22 17...

Page 1164: ...n d left headlight Left f r o n t side marker light 16 3 B e h i n d left of f r o n t b u m p e r Left headlight High beam 25 2 B e h i n d left headlight Left headlight Low beam 23 2 B e h i n d lef...

Page 1165: ...22 19...

Page 1166: ...ehind left kick panel connector P see page 22 44 Driver s under dash fuse relay box 2 22 Behind left kick panel connector Q see page 22 44 Ignition switch 12 7 In the steering c o l u m n covers Immob...

Page 1167: ...e of dash Passenger s under dash fuse relay box 8 16 Behind right kick panel connector J see page 22 45 Passenger s under dash fuse relay box 9 16 Behind right kick panel connector K see page 22 45 Re...

Page 1168: ...ght tweeter 14 2 Behind i n s t r u m e n t panel Shift lock s o l e n o i d 28 2 Behind console panel A T SRS m e m o r y erase signal MES 39 2 Behind left kick panel 01 02 connector models SRS unit...

Page 1169: ...22 23...

Page 1170: ...de of trunk High m o u n t brake light 16 2 M i d d l e of rear shelf Left rear door switch 13 1 Left quarter panel Left rear speaker 15 2 Left quarter panel T r u n k light 17 2 M i d d l e of rear s...

Page 1171: ...Fuel gauge s e n d i n g unit 14 5 Fuel tank Fuel tank pressure sensor 10 3 Left side of trunk High m o u n t brake light 12 2 Middle of rear shelf Left rear speaker 15 2 Left quarter panel Left side...

Page 1172: ...ector A see page 22 45 Passenger s u n d e r d a s h fuse relay b o x 8 3 B e h i n d right kick panel Canada connector G see page 22 45 Right rear d o o r s w i t c h 15 1 Right quarter panel Right r...

Page 1173: ...2 45 Passenger s under dash fuse relay box 6 3 Behind right kick panel Canada connector G see page 22 45 Right rear speaker 17 2 Right quarter panel W i n d o w antenna coil connector A 18 1 Middle of...

Page 1174: ...ight back up light 5 3 Right side of t r u n k lid Right inner taillight 6 2 Right side of t r u n k lid Right rear t u r n signal light 3 2 Right side of trunk Right taillight 4 4 Right side of trunk...

Page 1175: ...of trunk lid Right inner taillight 10 3 Right side of trunk lid Right rear side marker light 8 2 Right side of trunk Right taillight 9 6 Right side of trunk Trailer lighting connector 17 6 Left side o...

Page 1176: ...5 Behind left kick panel M o o n r o o f position switch 2 4 Roof area C502 7 7 B e h i n d left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A see pape 22 22 Roof Wire Harness Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities...

Page 1177: ...s seat 4 Power seat f r o n t u p d o w n m o t o r 4 2 Under driver s seat Power seat rear u p d o w n m o t o r 2 2 Under driver s seat Power seat slide m o t o r 1 2 Under driver s seat C551 10 10...

Page 1178: ...r s door Driver s under dash fuse relay box 8 6 Behind left kick panel Canada connector F see page 22 44 Driver s under dash fuse relay box 9 18 Behind left kick panel connector G see page 22 44 Left...

Page 1179: ...box 7 6 Behind left kick panel Canada connector F see page 22 44 Driver s under dash fuse relay box 8 18 Behind left kick panel connector G see page 22 44 Left p o w e r mirror 5 6 Driver s d o o r Ca...

Page 1180: ...ssenger s d o o r lock switch 4 3 Passenger s d o o r Security Passenger s d o o r speaker 11 2 Passenger s d o o r Passenger s p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r 10 2 Passenger s d o o r Passenger s p o...

Page 1181: ...or lock switch 4 3 Passenger s door Passenger s door speaker 11 2 Passenger s door Passenger s power window motor 10 2 Passenger s door Passenger s power window switch 5 6 Passenger s door Passenger s...

Page 1182: ...eft rear d o o r courtesy light 4 2 Left rear d o o r Left rear d o o r lock actuator 5 2 Left rear door Left rear d o o r lock k n o b switch 6 3 Left rear d o o r Security Left rear p o w e r w i n...

Page 1183: ...t 5 2 Right rear door Right rear d o o r lock actuator 4 2 Right rear door Right rear door lock knob switch 3 3 Right rear door Security Right rear p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r 6 2 Right rear door...

Page 1184: ...hind left kick panel Clutch Switch Sub Harness M T C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes Clutch interlock switch 2 2 Under left side of dash Clutch switch 3 3 U...

Page 1185: ...y box 7 2 Behind left kick panel c o n n e c t o r N see page 22 44 Front passenger s airbag assembly 1 2 Behind glove box SRS m e m o r y erase signal MES 6 2 Under left side of dash connector SRS un...

Page 1186: ...e harness A see page 22 22 G801 1 M i d d l e of floor B o d y g r o u n d via SRS m a i n harness SRS Floor Harness 00 Sedan with Side Airbags C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Locat...

Page 1187: ...nnector SRS unit 8 8 M i d d l e of floor 1 SRS unit 9 14 M i d d l e of floor SRS unit 10 18 M i d d l e of floor C503 1 8 U n d e r middle of dash Dashboard w i r e harness A see page 22 22 1 C556 6...

Page 1188: ...r f r o n t passenger s seat 22 39 Sedan C851 2 4 Under f r o n t passenger s seat Right side w i r e harness see Coupe page 22 26 C851 2 4 U n d e r f r o n t passenger s seat Right side w i r e harn...

Page 1189: ...ee page 22 16 Blower motor relay 11 4 C 13 3 Right engine compartment wire harness see page 22 16 Condenser fan relay 1 4 D 12 16 Right engine compartment wire harness see page 22 16 Diode 9 2 Not use...

Page 1190: ...e 22 32 H 5 6 Not used 1 13 18 Dashboard wire harness A see page 22 22 J 12 2 Service check connector K 14 18 Dashboard wire harness A see page 22 22 L 23 Not used M 15 6 Ignition switch lead see page...

Page 1191: ...used Diode 2 Diode 3 E 8 2 Passenger s door wire harness see page 22 34 F 7 20 Passenger s door wire harness see page 22 34 G 6 3 Right side wire harness see page 22 26 H 18 18 Dashboard wire harness...

Page 1192: ...gh mount brake light Brake failure sensor Trailer lighting connector 47 20A Fuse relay box socket Multiplex control unit driver s 48 20A WHT GRN ABS control unit 49 15A WHT GRN Turn signal hazard rela...

Page 1193: ...valve Gauge assembly Heated oxygen sensor relay Primary and secondary heated oxygen sensors Vehicle speed sensor VSS M T Vent shut solenoid valve 7 7 5A YEL GRN Multiplex control unit driver s All 98...

Page 1194: ...RED GRN Heater control panel A T gear position console light Driver s seat heater switch light Canada Audio unit Gauge lights Cruise main switch light Moonroof switch light Clock Hazard warning switc...

Page 1195: ...g lights control unit Canada Clutch switch M T Data link connector DLC Combination light switches Heater control panel 2 wires Windshield wiper washer switch G501 Moonroof switch Moonroof open relay M...

Page 1196: ...5 Remove the mounting bolt and pull the driver s under dash fuse relay box A or passenger s under dash fuse relay box B away from the body A 6 Disconnect the driver s or passenger s under dash fuse re...

Page 1197: ...K go to step 3 3 Check the indicator EYE If the EYE indicates the battery is charged go to step 4 If the EYE indicates a low charge go to step 7 4 Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the sur...

Page 1198: ...type A Radiator fan relay Normally open type A Reverse relay Normally open type A Seat heater relay Normally open type A Starter cut relay Normally open type A Taillight relay Normally open type A ABS...

Page 1199: ...e continuity between the No 1 and No 3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No 2 and No 4 terminals There should be no continuity between the No 1 and No 3 terminals when power is disc...

Page 1200: ...nuity between the No 2 and No 4 terminals when power is disconnected 3 1 4 5 2 Windshield wiper intermittent relay Five terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals There should be conti...

Page 1201: ...4 Disconnect the 6P connector from the driver s under dash fuse relay box W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 5 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position accord...

Page 1202: ...the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio s preset buttons 2 Disconnect the battery negative cable 3 Remove the steering column covers see page 17 25 4 Insert the ignition key and turn i...

Page 1203: ...Gauges Component Location Index C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E E N G I N E O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H G A U G E S E N D I N G U N I T p a g e 8 4 p a g e 10 5 cont d 22 57...

Page 1204: ...Gauges Component Location Index cont d S A F E T Y I N D I C A T O R p a g e 22 73 22 58...

Page 1205: ...I G H T 1 4 W Canada L E F T T U R N S I G N A L I N D I C A T O R L I G H T 1 4 W G A U G E L I G H T 3 4 W R I G H T T U R N S I G N A L I N D I C A T O R L I G H T 1 4 W S E A T B E L T R E M I N...

Page 1206: ...Gauges Circuit Diagram 98 99 models UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX 3 No 6 b 1 5 A No 9 7 5A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX Canada 6401 G302 22 60...

Page 1207: ...ENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR RESET SWITCH 3 If MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR LIGHT 1 4W ODO TRlP MAINTENANCE WASHER CIRCUIT WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR LIGHT 1 4W MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s CRUISE CONTR...

Page 1208: ...auges Circuit Diagram cont d 98 99 models TURN SIGNAL HAZARD RELAY LEFT RIGHT Y Y GRN BLU GRN YEL SRS UNIT V BLU GRN BLU V LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS GRN YEL RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS GRN BLU GRN YEL 22 6...

Page 1209: ...GINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT 1 4W 3 A A T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR DIMMING CIRCUIT LCD BACK LIGHT 1 4W X I V s A r DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER C3 RED BLU A6 BLU BLK B7 YEL RED MULTIPLEX CONT...

Page 1210: ...1 5 A No 9 7 5A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX ODO TRIP MAINTENANCE WASHER CIRCUIT To page 22 65 WHT YEL BLK YEL B9 YEL SAFETY iM9 i JR INDICATOR INDICATOR CIRCUIT 1 4W S B11 GAUGE ASSEMBLY V CHAR...

Page 1211: ...CATOR RESET SWITCH COOLANT TEMPERATURE TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER DRIVE CIRCUIT j DRIVE CIRCUIT j DRIVE CIRCUIT ODO TRIP MAINTENANCE WASHER CIRCUIT C2 YEL GRN MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s CRUISE CONTRO...

Page 1212: ...ont d 00 02 models TURN SIGNAL HAZARD RELAY LEFT RIGHT Y Y GRN BLU GRN YEL SRS UNIT v BLU GRN BLU V LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS GRN YEL v RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS GRN BLU GRN YEL BLK 1 G552 Sedan 01 02 Co...

Page 1213: ...DICATOR LIGHT 1 4W A A T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR DIMMING CIRCUIT LCD BACK LIGHT 1 4W DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER C3 RED BLU B6 GRN ORN A6 BLU BLK B7 YEL RED MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s Y RED...

Page 1214: ...a protective cloth C on the upper column cover 3 Disconnect the connectors D and remove the gauge assembly 4 Install in the reverse order of removal VSS Replacement M T 1 Disconnect the 3P connector...

Page 1215: ...d Is there continuity YES Goto step 5 NO Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS and G101 B 5 Connect the WHT test harness clip C to the positive probe of a voltmeter and connect the RED test harn...

Page 1216: ...more Y E S G o t o step 14 N O Replace the VSS 14 Disconnect the 22P connector B from the gauge assembly D A S H B O A R D W I R E H A R N E S S 2 2 P C O N N E C T O R B B L U W H T B1 B2 B4 B5 B6 B7...

Page 1217: ...i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 4 Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch ON II 5 Slowly rotate over 3 mph 2 km h 1 wheel with the other wheel blocked Does voltage pulse from 0 to...

Page 1218: ...ame time turn the ignition switch ON II and hold them more than 10 seconds Blinking Pattern Miles km Maintenance Reminder Light At 5 900 9 440 to 6 100 9 760 Blinks for 10 seconds when the ignition sw...

Page 1219: ...Safety Indicator System Component Location Index B R A K E L I G H T FAILURE S E N S O R T e s t p a g e 22 78 22 73...

Page 1220: ...CIRCUIT B8 B16 Without keyless entry system GRN ORN GRN MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s COURTESY LIGHT Y GRN ORN MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s COURTESY LIGHT 7 GRN DRIVER S DOOR SWITCH MULTIPLEX...

Page 1221: ...OSITION SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH WHT BLK h WHT BLK WHT BLK WHT BLK MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s ECM PCM CRUISE CONTROL UNIT ABS CONTROL UNIT TRAILER LIGHTING CONNECTOR GRN WHT ST HIGH MOUNT g BRAKE LIGH...

Page 1222: ...d the 14P connector C from the gauge assembly W i t h o u t k e y l e s s entry s y s t e m 2 Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact If the terminals ar...

Page 1223: ...he passenger s under dash fuse relay box Faulty trunk latch switch An open in the wire A7 GRN Front passenger s door open Check for continuity to ground There should be continuity NOTE Before testing...

Page 1224: ...ight in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on when the 6P connector is disconnected and the engine is running If the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator comes on and stays on check fo...

Page 1225: ...L UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX V WHT YEL A12 RED BLK A6 I A24 6 B11 I B17 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s 03BUZZER LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT CHARGING SYSTEM LIGHT YEL RED y WHT BLU VV L y A...

Page 1226: ...Test Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained B11 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground There should be continuity Poor ground G503 An open in the wire A6 Fuse relay b...

Page 1227: ...ned BIT BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground There should be continuity Poor ground G503 An open in the wire A12 Fuse relay box socket Under all conditions Check for voltage to grou...

Page 1228: ...Exterior Lights Component Location Index B R A K E P E D A L POSITION SWITCH CONTROLLER Input T e s t page 22 113 FRONT T U R N SIGNAL FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT 22 82...

Page 1229: ...101 B A C K U P L I G H T R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 22 101 L I C E N S E PLATE L I G H T S R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 22 103 B R A K E L I G H T a n d I N N E R T A I L L I G H T R e p l a c e...

Page 1230: ...LOW 51W J LOW HIGH DIMMER 11 PASSING BLU RED RED YEL RED GRN RED GRN RED YEL TAILLIGHT RELAY RED YEL RED BLK 6 a f i P J 10 COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH RED BLK BLK ORN WHT i BLK RFD BLK MULTIPLEX RED BLK...

Page 1231: ...K h MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s LOW 51W J a LOW HIGH DIMMER V C PASSING No 10 1 10A 2 15A PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX RED GRN 10 ORN WHT SO RED BLK i i i i r i i RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK...

Page 1232: ...10A DRL INDICATOR LIGHT V YEL RED RED BLU BLU WHT I I D ORN BLU RED RED GRN I Ilii_i _1 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT BRAKE SYSTEM LIGHT ABS CONTROL UNIT l U U N m u L U N i i GRN RED Y_ J l GRN...

Page 1233: ...BLK I i i i r MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s 1 1 RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK fcci i i fe i d LEFT RIGHT LEFT FRONT FRONT FRONT SIDE SIDE PARKING MARKER MARKER LIGH...

Page 1234: ...LAY BOX BATTERY No 41 100A No 55 40A WHT IGNITION BAT SWITCH G2j YEL GRN PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX DRIVER S UNDER DASH J No 5 1 No 6 FUSE RELAY 7 5A 10A BOX 7 5A 10A DRL INDICATOR LIGHT V...

Page 1235: ...W f 6 RED BLK RED BLK RED BIK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK S i I k LEFT FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT 8W RIGHT FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT 8W LEFT FRONT PARKING LIGHT 5W RIGHT FRONT PARKING LIGHT 5W...

Page 1236: ...ed In position fW GRN BLK GRN BLK WHT GRN BLK GRN BLK GRN BLK GRN BLK GRN BLK GRN BLK RIGHT BACK UP LIGHT TRAILER LIGHTING CONNECTOR LEFT RIGHT J L LEFT RIGHT L BACK UP fZ BACK UP 7 BACK UP T BACK UP...

Page 1237: ...TIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s v WHT BLK ABS CONTROL UNIT CRUISE CONTROL UNIT ECM PCM TRAILER LIGHTING CONNECTOR WHT BLK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH Closed Pedal depressed No 9 7 5A WHT BLK...

Page 1238: ...IGNITION SWITCH B A T IG1 No 9 7 5A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX MULTIPLEX I A15 A2 j CONTROL UNIT Q BRN Door Q MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s A6 0 BLU WHT GRN ORN BLK DOOR LOCK f p KNOB 1 1 SW...

Page 1239: ...is in the ignition switch Check for voltage to ground There should be 1 V or less Faulty ignition switch An open in the wire Poor ground G401 A16 Fuse relay box socket Driver s door open Check for vol...

Page 1240: ...rect the cause then recheck the system if all the input tests prove OK go to step 8 Cavit Wire Test condition Test Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained A7 PNK Driver s door lock kno...

Page 1241: ...he system If the terminals look OK check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables If there is no continuity replace the switch A 1 3 l W f T 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 Light...

Page 1242: ...e d repair t h e m as necessary and recheck t h e system If the t e r m i n a l s l o o k OK g o t o step 4 R E D B L U R E D W H T R E D Y E L R E D G R N 1 2 3 I 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B L K B L...

Page 1243: ...ould be continuity Faulty parking brake switch An open in the wire 8 BLU RED With automatic lights OFF Combination light switch ON ID Check for continuity to ground There should be continuity Faulty c...

Page 1244: ...nk is full The driver or someone who weight the same should sit in the driver s seat Load the trunk with the items you usually carry Push down on the front and rear bumpers several times to make sure...

Page 1245: ...o local requirements Then check that the arrow on the horizontal indicator gear is aligned with the mark on the horizontal indicator 01 02 models 1 Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center...

Page 1246: ...he trunk side trim see page 20 78 2 Disconnect the connectors from the taillight 3 Remove the three mounting nuts then pull out the taillight 4 Install the taillight and note these items Inspect the g...

Page 1247: ...t Coupe Taillights 1 Open the trunk lid and pull back the trunk side trim see page 20 78 2 Disconnect the 6P connector A from the taillight B C 3 Remove the four mounting nuts C then pull out the tail...

Page 1248: ...F 4 Remove the mounting nuts then pull out the inner taillight F BRAKE TAILLIGHT BULB 27 7 W BACK UP LIGHT BULB 21W High Mount Brake Light Replacement 1 Push the light rearward to release the clips 2...

Page 1249: ...the 2P connector B from the light LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB 5 W 2 Take the lens off then replace the bulb C Rear Side Marker Light Replacement Coupe 1 Remove the screw from the rear side marker light...

Page 1250: ...Turn Signal Hazard Flasher Component Location Index 22 104...

Page 1251: ...BLK GRN YEL DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BLK YEL No 10 7 5A T X J D COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH OX LX TAILLIGHT RELAY EX V GRN YEL 2 7 J 3 10 YEL RED 9 3 RED BLK 10f1J HAZARD WARNING 6 6 SWITCH O...

Page 1252: ...1 Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground There should be continuity Poor ground G401 An open in the wire 2 Ignition switch ON II Check for voltage to ground There should be battery voltag...

Page 1253: ...01 02 m o d e l s T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 2 Pull the hazard warning switch C out from the clock 3 Disconnect the 10P connector D from the hazard warning switch 4 Check f...

Page 1254: ...Interior Lights Component Location Index T e s t p a g e 22 111 22 108...

Page 1255: ...Circuit Diagram BODY UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BATTERY OPEN CLOSE 22 109...

Page 1256: ...he four mounting screws B 3 Disconnect the 3P connector C from the housing D 4 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table T e r m i n a l P o s i t i o n...

Page 1257: ...without keyless entry security alarm system or 6P connector with keyless entry security alarm system from the trunk latch Without Keyless Entry Security Alarm System With Keyless Entry Security Alarm...

Page 1258: ...LLIGHT RELAY EX Y RED BLK RED BLK A6 A12 0 RED BLK B22 AUDIO UNIT LIGHT A T GEAR POSITION LIGHT DRIVER S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT PASSENGER S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH LIGHT...

Page 1259: ...ty Wire Test condition Test Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained A6 Fuse relay box socket Combination light switch ON 3 g or ID Jump battery voltage to B16 RED GRN on automatic head...

Page 1260: ...e the gauge assembly A see page 22 68 R E D W H T W H T R E D 2 Disconnect the 22P connector B 3 Measure resistance between the B4 and B5 terminals while rotating the adjusting dial Resistance should...

Page 1261: ...Entry Light Control System Component Location Index 22 115...

Page 1262: ...O N o F F V CEILING LIGHT BRN RED BLU WHT GRN ORN GRY YEL GRN UN LOCK X DRIVER S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH i IGNITION P KEY QJ SWITCH 3 Closed Key inserted GRN WHT DRIVER S D DOOR SWITCH Closed Door open...

Page 1263: ...se relay box socket Under all conditions Attach to ground The ignition key light should come on Blown No 47 20A fuse in the under hood fuse relay box Blown LED An open in the wire A6 Fuse relay box so...

Page 1264: ...ocket If any test indicates a problem find and correct the cause then recheck the system If all the input tests prove OK go to step 8 Cavity Wire Test condition Test Desired result Possible cause if r...

Page 1265: ...and correct the cause then recheck the system If all the input tests prove OK go to step 11 Cavity Wire Test condition Test Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained A17 BLK RED Driver s...

Page 1266: ...witch 1 Remove the steering column upper and lower covers see page 17 25 2 Disconnect the 7P connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 Check for continuity between terminals No 1 and No 3 There should be continuity w...

Page 1267: ...and the housing C 4 Disconnect the 3P connector D from the housing 5 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table T e r m i n a l 1 4 3 P o s i t i o n 5 o...

Page 1268: ...Stereo Sound System Component Location Index R E A R R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 22 125 W I N D O W A N T E N N A T e s t p a g e 22 126 Repair p a g e 22 126 22 122...

Page 1269: ...T RED ANTENNA LEAD WHT RED WHT GRN v WHT RED ACCESSORY SOCKET I G581 0 0 0 AUDIO UNIT 1 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 1 6 J 6 T 1 5 J 5 T 18 8 T 1 7 7 GRY WHT BRN WHT GRY BLK k i BRN BLK BLU GRN GRY BLK LEFT REAR R...

Page 1270: ...ke sure the audio unit connectors are plugged in properly and the antenna lead is connected properly Enter the anti theft code for the radio then enter the customer s radio station presets Audio Unit...

Page 1271: ...ector from the speaker C B Tweeter Carefully pry the tweeter A out of the dashboard then disconnect the 2P connector B from the tweeter A Rear 1 Remove the two screws from the trunk side then remove t...

Page 1272: ...broken section must be no longer than 1 inch 1 Lightly rub the area around the broken section A with fine steel wool then clean it with alcohol c 2 Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of...

Page 1273: ...see page 20 59 Sedan see page 20 77 2 Disconnect the connectors A B from the window antenna coil C 3 Check for continuity between terminal B2 and body ground and between terminals A1 and B1 If there i...

Page 1274: ...BLK YEL No 13 7 5A PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX No9 7 5A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX WHT YEL YEL WHT YEL WHT YEL YEL YEL ECM PCM GAUGE ASSEMBLY 5 DRIVE CIRCUIT LCD BACK LIGHT 0 7W COMB...

Page 1275: ...anel B B 2 Disconnect the 5P connector C from the clock 3 Remove the clock Terminals Cavity Wire Connect to 1 YEL IG1 Main clock power supply 2 WHT YEL Constant power 3 RED BLK Lights on signal 4 RED...

Page 1276: ...Horns Component Location Index U N D E R H O O D F U S E R E L A Y B O X H O R N S Test p a g e 22 131 22 130...

Page 1277: ...ABLE T HORN T I J REEL rj Low VjV CRUISE CONTROL SET RESUME CANCEL SWITCH r HORN 0 SWITCH HORN High Horn Test Replacement 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the horn cover A C 3 Disconnect the 1P connector B an...

Page 1278: ...Accessory Power Socket Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX YEL WHT BLK 3 No B 7 5A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX YEL BLK AUDIO UNIT BLK BLK 1 1 G501 G 5 S 1 22 132...

Page 1279: ...e system If the terminals look OK go to step 4 4 Turn the ignition switch ACC I and check for voltage between the No 1 and No 2 terminals There should be battery voltage If there is no battery voltage...

Page 1280: ...ntrol System Component Location Index M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T P A S S E N G E R S H a s b u i l t i n t h e b e e p e r M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L I N S P E C T I O N C O N N E C...

Page 1281: ...Circuit Diagram Power Ground Communication Lines UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH 22 135...

Page 1282: ...N Driver s Passenger s between the driver s and the passenger s multiplex control units Wire color PNK The control units always communicate via these lines when the system is operating and they stop c...

Page 1283: ...e DTC and repeat it every 3 seconds If there is a code it will blink beep pause then repeat the code as long as the ignition switch is ON II If there is more than one DTC the system will indicate them...

Page 1284: ...rom the SCS connector Cancel the key off operation timer in the power window system by opening and closing one of the doors Make sure that the exterior lights are off If you do not operate any switche...

Page 1285: ...knob switch UNLOCK Driver s door key cylinder switch UNLOCK Driver s door lock switch LOCK UNLOCK 14 With the system in Mode 1 and the ignition switch still in the ON II position disconnect the speci...

Page 1286: ...t or combination switch ON Multiplex Control Unit Door Test all the switches in the following order otherwise the test results maybe inaccurate Driver s door lock knob switch LOCK Driver s key cylinde...

Page 1287: ...lex control unit Door Unit 1 Remove the driver s door panel and disconnect the connectors from the door multiplex control unit 2 Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all maki...

Page 1288: ...ox An open in the wire A2 GRN WHT Ignition switch ON ID Check for voltage to ground There should be battery voltage Blown No 15 20A fuse in the passenger s under dash fuse relay box Blown No 54 40A fu...

Page 1289: ...A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A2D A21 A22 A23 A24 PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX SOCKET Cavity Wire Test condition Test Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained A24 Fuse relay box...

Page 1290: ...open in the wire Blown No 13 7 5A fuse in the passenger s under dash fuse relay box Blown No 54 40A fuse in the under hood fuse relay box An open in the wire A14 Under all conditions Check for continu...

Page 1291: ...Power Mirrors Component Location Index 22 145...

Page 1292: ...N SWITCH WHT 0 O YEL DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX No 41 100A No 42 50A No 4 7 5A I YEL BLK POWER MIRROR SWITCH LEFT RIGHT i i DOWN Q I LEFT I T RIGHT BLU WHT LEFT MIRROR 2 DOWN 1 1 i LEFT DOWN 1...

Page 1293: ...SH FUSE RELAY BOX No 4 7 5A crxjD YEL BLK POWER MIRROR SWITCH q f DEFOGGER oV SWITCH LEFT RIGHT i DOWN LEFT Q I O RIGHT LEFT RIGHT ORN WHT YEL WHT BLK BLU GPN LEFT MIRROR I 5 DOWN UP ORN WHT 2 JWN l l...

Page 1294: ...g left with the ignition switch ON II If the mirror does not tilt down or does not swing left check for an open in the BLU WHT or BLU ORN wire between the left mirror and the 10P connector If the wire...

Page 1295: ...F 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table Mirror Switch T e r m i n a l P o s i t i o n U P D O W N LEFT R I G H T U P D O W N LEF...

Page 1296: ...r m i n a l s 3 Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table T e r m i n a l 1 2 3 P o s i t i o n 4 5 6 T I L T U P a 0 T I L T D O W N e e S W I N G LEFT o S W I N...

Page 1297: ...4 Protect the mirror housing with shop towel A 5 Insert the screwdriver B along holder ramp C and placing flat blade underneath adapter ear D at end of ramp Be careful not to damage the mirror housin...

Page 1298: ...d e t1 YEL WHT I BLU BLK BLU GRN C a n a d a 98 00 m o d e l s Left BLK WHT BLU RED Right BLK WHT BLU RED 1 YEL WHT I YEL BLK YEL RED t YEL WHT I BLU BLK BLU GRN V i e w f r o m w i r e side 01 02 m o...

Page 1299: ...connector 2 Cut the wire harness with wire cutters 3 Record the terminal locations and wire colors 4 Remove the mirror holder A from the mirror housing B Gently pull it out by hand 5 Remove the 3 scr...

Page 1300: ...i r e s i d e Canada L e f t B L K B L K B L K R i g h t B L K 1 2 4 5 6 G R N Y E L 1 I I 2 4 5 6 R E D B L U G R N I Y E L B R N W H T 0 1 0 2 m o d e l s V i e w from w i r e s i d e 8 Apply tape t...

Page 1301: ...Moonroof Component Location Index 22 155...

Page 1302: ...NO 41 100A N0 51 40A WHT BLU MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s Key oft timer circuit COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH DX LX TAILLIGHT RELAY EX RED BLK MOONROOF SWITCH LIGHT 56Wx2 1 RED MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Pa...

Page 1303: ...ashboard and disconnect its connector 3 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table T e r m i n a l Position 1 3 2 4 5 6 C L O S E o fi o T I L T o fi o o...

Page 1304: ...Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index 22 158...

Page 1305: ...40A WHT YEL No 3 7 5A DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BLK YEL WHT GRN BLK YEL PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BLK GRN BRN YEL BkK YEL HEATER CONTROL PANEL Rear window defogger switch and defo...

Page 1306: ...ely 6 V with the ignition switch and the defogger switch ON If the voltage is as specified the defogger wire is OK If the voltage is not as specified repair the defogger wire If it is more than 6 V th...

Page 1307: ...N G E R S U N D E R D A S H F U S E R E L A Y B O X KEY OFF T I M E R CIRCUIT In t h e m u l t i p l e x c o n t r o l u n i t p a s s e n g e r s I n p u t Test p a g e 22 174 LEFT REAR W I N D O W M...

Page 1308: ...HT BAT IGNITION G 1 SWITCH BLK YEL No 9 7 5A YEL WHT YEL MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s To page 22 164 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s To page 22 165 GRN WHT DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX MUL...

Page 1309: ...GRN WHT WHT YEL l PASSENGER S SWITCH From p a p V22 164 165 WHT RED POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH In the MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT DOOR B2 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s To page 22 164 G551 G401 cont d 22...

Page 1310: ...SE From page 22 162 WHT YEL A12 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s A16 GRN ORN No 7 20A PASSENGER S FUSE From page 22 162 Y WHT YEL D DRIVER S DOOR SWITCH Closed Door open A1S GRN A7 GRN BLU DOWN T UP 4...

Page 1311: ...losed Door open MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s Key off timer circuit A8 NO 16J20A PASSENGER S FUSE From page 22 162 BLK T WHT BLK I 3 A7 A6 No 8 20A PASSENGER S FUSE From page 22 162 YEL GRN YEL Y...

Page 1312: ...4 40A No 42 50A No 51 40A YEL WHT BLU WHT BLK YEL j No 9 7 5A MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s From page 22 166 DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX YEL MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s To page 22 1...

Page 1313: ...FB Y 1 WHT YEL WHT YEL WHT YEL GRN WHT PASSENGER S SWITCH From p a p V 22 166 167 next page WHT RED MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s To page 22 166 cont d 22 167...

Page 1314: ...Power Windows Circuit Diagram Sedan cont d 01 02 models From previous I page No 9 7 5 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH To page 22 165 G581 22 168...

Page 1315: ...BODY 01 02 models RIGHT REAR WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH To page 22 165 FRONT PASSENGER S WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH To page 22 165 22 169...

Page 1316: ...K No 41 100A No 51 40A No 42 50A No 54 40A BLK YEL PASSENGER S SWITCH To page 122 167 PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX WHT BLU YEL MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s From page 122 171 No 13 7 JA...

Page 1317: ...BODY DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX WHT RED POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH To page 22 170 22 171...

Page 1318: ...YEL BLK A G581 YEL BLK GRN WHT WHT YEL A2 WHT YEL PASSENGER S SWITCH To page 22 171 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s To page 22 171 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s To page 22 171 BLK YEL POWER WINDO...

Page 1319: ...VER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX 01 02models No 13 7 5A PASSENGER S FUSE From page 22 170 I T WHT YEL No 9 7 5A crxjo WHT YEL WHT YEL YEL PASSENGER S WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH To page 22 17...

Page 1320: ...r s multiplex control unit to the driver s under dash fuse relay box and perform the following input tests at Connector A on the back of the driver s under dash fuse relay box For driver s under dash...

Page 1321: ...k OK go to step 8 FUSE RELAY BOX SOCKET A1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A10 A11 A12 A 1 3 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A 2 4 A 1 3 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A 2 4 PASSENGER...

Page 1322: ...box connector socket location see page 22 45 If any test indicates a problem find and correct the cause then recheck the system If all the input tests prove OK go to step 10 Cavity Wire Test conditio...

Page 1323: ...cessary and recheck the system If the terminals look OK go to step 12 M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T D O O R C O N N E C T O R A R E D Y E L W H T Y E L G R N W H T RED S P A1 A2 A4 A6 A7 A8...

Page 1324: ...rminal to the A1 terminal Check the driver s window motor operation The window should go up NOTE If the window is up jump A11 to A12 and A10to A1 the window should go down Blown No 13 7 5A fuse in the...

Page 1325: ...oor panel 2 Remove the four mounting screws then remove the master switch from the panel Passenger s Switch Replacement 1 Remove the screw and passenger s switch assembly from the door panel 2 Remove...

Page 1326: ...lace it Pulser Test 5 Connect the test leads of an analog ohmmeter to the No 3 and No 4 terminals 6 Run the motor by connecting power and ground to the No 1 and No 2 terminals The ohmmeter needle shou...

Page 1327: ...Wiper Washer Component Location Index W A S H E R LEVEL S W I T C H Canada T e s t page 22 190 22 181...

Page 1328: ...P A WASHER Q J SWITCH OFF INT A1 BLK YEL lit A2 GRN OFF INT A5 WHT GRN BLK WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR R WINDSHIELD M WASHER MOTOR BLK BLK JCL G301 1 All 98 99 models 00 02 Sedan 2 00 02Coupe G302 BLU YEL...

Page 1329: ...CH TON Lever up 1 LOFF Lever down J PARKING BRAKE SWITCH B9 No 47 20A FUSE GRN YEL INTERMITTENT DWELL TIME CONTROLLER GRN WHT B15 WHT YEL BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH GAUGE ASSEMBLY ABS CO...

Page 1330: ...t INT Check for voltage to ground There should be battery voltage Blown No 7 7 5A No 12 30A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box Faulty wiper switch An open in the wire A8 Fuse relay box soc...

Page 1331: ...nect the connector to the driver s unit and make this input test at the connector If the test indicates a problem find and correct the cause then recheck the system If the test proves OK go to step 6...

Page 1332: ...at the connector and fuse relay box socket If a test indicates a problem find and correct the cause then recheck the system If all the input tests prove OK the control unit must be faulty replace it C...

Page 1333: ...t If the terminals are bent loose or corroded repair them as necessary and recheck the system If the terminals look OK check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables...

Page 1334: ...r fails to run smoothly replace it T e r m i n a l Position 1 2 4 L O W S P E E D 0 H I G H S P E E D e 5 Connect an analog voltmeter between the No 5 and No 3 terminals and run the motor at low or hi...

Page 1335: ...s to the park position If necessary replace any damaged clips Check the wiper motor operation Washer Motor Test 1 Remove the left inner fender see page 20 167 2 Disconnect the connector from the washe...

Page 1336: ...bfft 3 Remove the three bolts C and washer reservoir D 4 Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal Check the washer motor operation Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1 Remove the left...

Page 1337: ...the left inner fender see page 20 167 2 Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips then remove the tube 3 Install in the reverse order of removal Take care not to pinch the washer tube Check the w...

Page 1338: ...Power Seat Component Location Index 8 way Adjustable REAR U P D O W N M O T O R 2 way Adjustable T e s t R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 22 196 22 192...

Page 1339: ...R S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BLU RED B6 B2 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH o p 6 p 6 p o p UP DOWN N J BACK FOR A 0 WARD ft WARD 6 o p o p a DOWN f UP BACK FOR WARD o WARD B5 A3 A4 A5 A2 B4 B3 B1 BLK RE...

Page 1340: ...djustable UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX BATTERY No 41 100A No 55 40A r x j o r j No 2 20A PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX RED 1 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH a UP V DOWN O p I GRN YEL GRN RED BLK BLK...

Page 1341: ...E S W I T C H FOR W A R D kJ oo S L I D E S W I T C H B A C K W A R D o o S L I D E S W I T C H B A C K W A R D o oo S L I D E S W I T C H B A C K W A R D o J oo RECLINE S W I T C H FOR W A R D c o o...

Page 1342: ...5P connector D from the adjustment switch then remove the switch from the cover by removing its two mounting screws 3 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to t...

Page 1343: ...4 F o r w a r d 0 0 B a c k w a r d e Slide motor T e r m i n a l Position A1 A5 F o r w a r d e B a c k w a r d Front up down motor T e r m i n a l Position A 3 A 4 U P D O W N e Rear up down motor T...

Page 1344: ...ng disconnect battery power immediately W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 3 Test the motor T e r m i n a l P o s i t i o n 2 4 U P e D O W N 4 If the motor does not run or fails to run...

Page 1345: ...Seat Heaters Canada Component Location Index F R O N T P A S S E N G E R S S E A T H E A T E R S W I T C H T e s t R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 22 201 22 199...

Page 1346: ...O F F Above 109 F 43 C J B R B R E A K E R TON Below 86 F 30 C 1 l O F F Above 122 F 50 C J HI High LO Low DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX No 3 7 5A SEAT HEATER RELAY COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH DX L...

Page 1347: ...F o o 4 If the continuity is not as specified replace the switch Seat Heater Test 1 Carefully remove the driver s and passenger s seat see page 20 99 2 Check for continuity in the driver s seat heater...

Page 1348: ...Immobilizer System Component Location index I M M O B I L I Z E R RECEIVER U N I T T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g p a g e 22 206 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 22 207 22 202...

Page 1349: ...15A YEL No 1 15A No 13 7 5A DRIVER S DRIVER S FUSE FUSE PASSENGERS UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX No 13 7 5A WHT BLU 3 IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER UNIT KEY o IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT 1 4W YEL BLK YEL BLK RED...

Page 1350: ...he II position the immobilizer unit sends power to the transponder in the ignition key The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the immobilizer unit to the ECM PCM I M M O B I L I Z E R...

Page 1351: ...blinking until the ignition switch is turned OFF If the ignition switch is turned OFF the indicator will blink for about 5 seconds to signal that the ECM PCM has been set correctly then the indicator...

Page 1352: ...11 3 Is DTC P1607 indicated Y E S R e p l a c e the ECM PCM see page 11 5 N O G o t o step 2 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II with the proper key 3 Check to see if the immobilizer indicator light com...

Page 1353: ...receiver unit see page 22 207 NO Repair open in the BLU wire between the immobilizer receiver unit and ECM PCM Immobilizer Receiver Unit Replacement 1 Remove the driver s dashboard lower cover and st...

Page 1354: ...C H Test page 22 227 D R I V E R S D O O R L O C K A C T U A T O R K N O B S W I T C H Actuator Test page 22 225 K n o b S w i t c h T e s t page 22 226 R e p l a c e m e n t page 20 14 L E F T R E A...

Page 1355: ...H O O D S W I T C H Test p a g e 22 229 T A I L L I G H T S 22 209...

Page 1356: ...NDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX BLK YEL No 9 7 5A orx o Y E L No 10 1 OA Sedan 15A Coupe PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX RED GRN RED YEL BLU RED HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY Canada Y BLU RED LEFT HEADLIGHT LOW...

Page 1357: ...T YEL e E MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s To page 22 212 214 SECURITY INDICATOR LED WHT YEL A12 RED BLU A5 BRN i _ MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Door To page 22 214 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s BLU GRN...

Page 1358: ...page 22 211 FUSE From pa V22 211 PNK B9 WHT YEL WHT A23 YEL O A22 HEADLIGHT RELAY FrompageN 22 210 I V V V V V BLU RED O A20 No 11 7 5A PASSENGER S FUSE From page 22 211 WHT BLU MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT...

Page 1359: ...S M I T T E R U N L O C K MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT UNLOCK A3 UNLOCK LOCK o g A17 A 5 DOOR LOCK KONB GRN BLK FRONT PASSENGER S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH KEY ORN D UNLOCK LOCK _ Q r _ A4 T A16 BLU ORN BLK BLU...

Page 1360: ...S FUSE From page V22 211 v BRN WHT YEL i A15 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Door O O A17 BLK RED DRIVER S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH UNLOCK A7 DOOR LOCK KNOB UNLOCK LOCK A16 BLU PNK LOCK V KEY BLK A6 UNLOCK LOCK Q...

Page 1361: ...l it senses that the vehicle is not closed and locked and the system will not arm Conversely a switch that is slightly misadjusted can sound an alarm for no apparent reason In this case a significant...

Page 1362: ...unlock but not lock the system may think a door is open Check the door switches the dome light operation and the safety indicator To open the trunk push the Trunk Release button and hold it for about...

Page 1363: ...E T A1 A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 AB A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T D R I V E R S C O N...

Page 1364: ...use relay box socket Headlight switch ON ID and jump A10 to battery voltage The headlights should come on Poor ground G401 Faulty headlight relay 1 or 2 An open in the wire Faulty combination light sw...

Page 1365: ...r voltage to ground There should be 1 V or less Faulty hood switch Poor ground G201 An open in the wire B6 YEL Hood closed Check for voltage to ground There should be 5 V or more Faulty hood switch Po...

Page 1366: ...7 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T P A S S E N G E R S C O N N E C T O R B W H T R E D B1 A B9 B11 B15 B16 B21 B22 Y...

Page 1367: ...3 Fuse relay box socket U n d e r all c o n d i t i o n s Check f o r v o l t a g e t o g r o u n d T h e r e s h o u l d be battery v o l t a g e B l o w n No 6 20A fuse in t h e passenger s under d...

Page 1368: ...or ground G581 Faulty front passenger s door lock switch An open in the wire F3 BLK BLU Front passenger s door lock key cylinder locked Check for voltage to ground There should be 1 V or less Poor gro...

Page 1369: ...BRN BLK RED 12 With the door unit still disconnected make these input tests at the connector If any test indicates a problem find and correct the cause then recheck the system If all the input tests p...

Page 1370: ...uld be 5 V or more Faulty driver s door lock actuator Poor ground G401 An open in the wire A17 BLK RED Driver s door lock knob unlocked Check for voltage to ground There should be less than 1 V Faulty...

Page 1371: ...tage only momentarily Terminal 1 2 Position 1 2 L O C K 0 U N L O C K 4 If the actuator does not operate as specified replace it 1 Remove the rear door panel see page 20 8 2 Disconnect the 2P connecto...

Page 1372: ...ed replace the lock knob switch Passenger s Door Lock Knob Switch Test 1 Remove the passenger s door panel see page 20 8 2 Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator F R O N T P A S S E N G E R S R...

Page 1373: ...n according to the table T e r m i n a l P o s i t i o n LOCK OFF U N L O C K o o o o 4 If the continuity is not as specified replace the switch 1 Remove the front door inner handle see page 20 8 2 Re...

Page 1374: ...unk lid 2 Disconnect the 2P connector from the trunk key cylinder switch T e r m i n a l side o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s 3 Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position accordi...

Page 1375: ...d to the No 1 terminal 4 If the LED does not come on replace it Hood Switch Test 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s 3...

Page 1376: ...ree transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory If a fourth code is stored the code which was input first will be erased NOTE It is important to maintain the time limits between the...

Page 1377: ...E Y C Y L I N D E R S W I T C H Test p a g e 22 227 R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 20 14 F R O N T P A S S E N G E R S D O O R S W I T C H R I G H T REAR D O O R L O C K A C T U A T O R T e s t p a g...

Page 1378: ...NDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX YEL BLK YEL WHT YEL No 9 7 5A r jo PASSENGER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Door To page 22 234 YEL WHT WHT YEL PNK A12 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Driver s B11...

Page 1379: ...GRN RED LT GRN RED LT GRN RED LT GRN RED L O C K MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Passenger s A11 UNLOCK BODY UNLOCK LOCK o n A17 T A5 DOOR LOCK KONB KEY ORN D BLK BLU 3 _ V I FRONT PASSENGER S DOOR KEY CYLINDE...

Page 1380: ...2 232 V BRN WHT YEL A 1 5 o o A1 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT Door r Q A17 BLK RED A7 DOOR LOCK KNOB UNLOCK LOCK f O A16 BLU PNK DRIVER S WX5R LOOK KNOB SWITCH UNLOCK LOCK v KEY a BLK A6 UNLOCK LOCK D Q A1B...

Page 1381: ...Location Index 23 23 Precautions and Procedures 23 28 General Troubleshooting Information 23 41 SRS Unit Identification 23 47 DTC Troubleshooting Index 23 48 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 23 61 Syste...

Page 1382: ...r Simulator 1 07TAZ SZ5011A SRS Simulator Lead C 1 2 07TAZ 001020A Backprobe Adapter 17 mm 07XAZ S1A0100 SRS Test Box 4P 1 07XAZ S1A0200 SRS Simulator Lead E 1 07XAZ SZ30100 SRS Simulator Lead F 1 07Y...

Page 1383: ...Seat Belts Component Location Index Coupe 23 3...

Page 1384: ...Seat Belts Component Location Index Sedan F R O N T S E A T B E L T B U C K L E S page 23 9 23 4...

Page 1385: ...eset buttons 2 Slide the front seat forward fully 3 01 02 models Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work 4 Remove these items see page 20 128 Rear seat...

Page 1386: ...the upper anchor bolt B and lower anchor bolt C the retractor mounting bolt D and the retractor bolt E Remove the front seat belt F and retractor G 98 00 models without tensioner B 7 16 20 U N F 32 N...

Page 1387: ...T H E D W A n t H A N C H O R C O L L A R S LOCK W A S H E R Retractor bolt construction TOOTHED LOCK WASHER Front Seat Beit Replacement Sedan 01 02 models SRS components are located in this area Rev...

Page 1388: ...e 20 75 9 Remove the center pillar upper trim see page 20 75 10 Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster A 8 x 1 25mm 2 2 N m 2 2 k g f m 16 Ibf ft 11 Install the seat belt and retractor in the reverse ord...

Page 1389: ...E T R A C T O R Seat Belt Buckle 1 Remove the front seat see page 20 99 2 Remove the following parts from the front seat Manual seat center cover see page 20 104 Manual height adjustable seat center...

Page 1390: ...placement Sedan cont d 2 way power seat 98 99 models T o s e a t belt buckle 2 way power seat 00 model T o s e a t belt buckle 2 way power seat 01 02 models T o s e a t belt buckle 8 way power seat 1...

Page 1391: ...er of removal Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown Center anchor bolt installation W A V E SPRING WASHER CENTER WASHER ANCHOR Without manual seat and without 2 way power seat 00 02...

Page 1392: ...ese items see page 20 128 Rear seat backs Rear seat cushion 3 Remove these items see page 20 76 Rear bulkhead cover Rear side trim panel 4 Remove the side trim see page 20 74 5 Remove the upper anchor...

Page 1393: ...S COLLAR Lower anchor bolt installation LOWER ANCHOR BOLT LOWER ANCHOR TOOTHED LOCK W A S H E R RETRACTOR B 0 L T R E T R A C T O R T O O T H E D LOCK W A S H E R Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles 1...

Page 1394: ...elt and retractor in the reverse order of removal and note these items Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions see page 23 17 Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown Befor...

Page 1395: ...center belt 4 Remove the lower anchor bolt A the retractor mounting ET screw B the retractor bolt C and remove the rear seat belt D and retractor E C 7 1 6 2 0 U N F 3 2 N m 3 3 k g f m 24 Ibfft Lower...

Page 1396: ...3 2 N m 3 3 k g f m 2 4 Ibfft 3 Remove these items see page 20 77 Rear door trim both sides as necessary Rear pillar trim both sides Rear bulkhead cover High mount brake light Lock cylinder trim Cente...

Page 1397: ...nter belt Center anchor bolt construction Retractor bolt construction Inspection Retractor 01 02 models SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations see page 23 23 and pr...

Page 1398: ...use the seat belts to retract slowly Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol 4 Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly The seat belt is desi...

Page 1399: ...ent points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether The attachment points are located on the rear shelf just behind the rear seat back When using a child sea...

Page 1400: ...or covers B from the attachment points C on the rear shelf D C 2 Remove the child seat tether anchors E Do not remove the toothed washer F from the tether anchor 3 Install the child seat tether anchor...

Page 1401: ...child seat tether anchor A and both side child seat tether anchors B Do not remove the toothed washer C from the tether anchor 3 Install the child seat tether anchors in the reverse order of removal...

Page 1402: ...ild seat tether anchor upper cover E and both side child seat tether anchor upper covers F from the attachment points B on the rear shelf C 3 Remove the middle child seat tether anchor G and both side...

Page 1403: ...SRS Component Location index 98 00 Models without side airbags C O N N E C T O R DLC 16P 23 23...

Page 1404: ...c e m e n t page 23 278 Disposal page 23 284 F R O N T P A S S E N G E R S A I R B A G R e p l a c e m e n t page 23 280 Disposal page 23 284 S R S U N I T R e p l a c e m e n t page 23 296 S R S UNIT...

Page 1405: ...L C 1 6 P S R S U N I T G R O U N D D R I V E R S S I D E A I R B A G R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 23 282 D i s p o s a l p a g e 23 284 F R O N T P A S S E N G E R S A I R B A G R e p l a c e m e n...

Page 1406: ...S O R F R O N T P A S S E N G E R S SIDE A I R B A G R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 23 282 D i s p o s a l p a g e 23 286 RIGHT SIDE S E A T BELT T E N S I O N E R R e p l a c e m e n t Sedan p a g e...

Page 1407: ...A G R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 23 280 D i s p o s a l p a g e 2 3 2 8 6 S R S U N I T R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 23 296 R I G H T S I D E S E A T B E L T T E N S I O N E R R e p l a c e m e n t...

Page 1408: ...n making SRS repairs Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled such as dents cracks or deformation Use only a...

Page 1409: ...ever put anything on the removed airbag Keep free from any oil grease detergent or water to prevent damage to the airbag assembly Store the removed airbag on a secure flat surface away from any high h...

Page 1410: ...or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9 8 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 2 Ibfft Do not spill water...

Page 1411: ...ver the following is performed see step 6 on page 23 291 Installation of the steering wheel Installation of the cable reel Installation of the steering column Other steering related adjustment or inst...

Page 1412: ...ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal to metal contact Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose Precautions for Electrica...

Page 1413: ...in the direction shown As the two connector halves are pressed together the sleeve A is pushed back by the pawl C Do not touch the sleeve 2 When the connector halves are completely connected the pawl...

Page 1414: ...irbags are different make sure you install only the correct replacement parts Label SIDE AIRBAG Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer make sure you replace any seat components seat...

Page 1415: ...onnecting the SRS main harness A from the SRS unit disconnect both airbags C D Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector B disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector C S R S U N I T S R S M A...

Page 1416: ...e from the battery and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A 18P A from the SRS unit disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector C...

Page 1417: ...nnector D Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B 14P E from the SRS unit disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors G l Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector B disconnect the driver s air...

Page 1418: ...irbag 2P connector A from 00 Model the SRS floor harness 2P connectors B or both side wire harness 2P connectors B 1 Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at least 3 minutes A Front Passenger...

Page 1419: ...both side airbag 2P connectors K M Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector B disconnect the driver s airbag 4P connector C Before disconnecting the driver s side wire harness 4P connector C5...

Page 1420: ...ver s airbag 4P connector A and cable reel 4P connector B A Front Passenger s Airbag 3 Remove the glove box then disconnect the front passenger s airbag 4P connector A and SRS main harness 4P connecto...

Page 1421: ...n the ohmmeter range A tester with a higher output could damage the airbag circuit or cause accidental airbag deployment and possible injury Whenever the ignition switch is ON II or has been turned OF...

Page 1422: ...n see example 2 below If a continuous and an intermittent failure occur at the same time both DTCs will be indicated as continuous failures When the system is normal no DTCs the SRS indicator light wi...

Page 1423: ...ing procedure for this DTC 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds 6 Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester C from the DLC 16P B Patterns of DTC Indications The DTC consists of a main code and...

Page 1424: ...em with the system If the SRS indicator light does not come on always check for an open or a short to ground in the SCS circuit before troubleshooting the system Example of the DTC Indications 1 Conti...

Page 1425: ...arness and the connectors take a test drive quick acceleration quick braking cornering turn the steering wheel fully left and right and hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds If the problem recurs the SRS...

Page 1426: ...dicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator light went off 8 The SRS indicator light comes...

Page 1427: ...t Identify the SRS unit in the vehicle using the chart below then follow the proper flow chart in the following pages The identification mark is at the end of the model number on the SRS unit MAKER ID...

Page 1428: ...gh 8 2 check battery system voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs see page 23 106 6 4 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 t...

Page 1429: ...ng DTCs 5 1 through 8 6 check battery system voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs see page 23 106 6 4 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troublesh...

Page 1430: ...TCs see page 23 106 7 1 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 6 check battery system voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troubleshooting t...

Page 1431: ...nternal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 6 check battery system voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs see page 23 106 6...

Page 1432: ...voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs see page 23 106 7 2 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 8 check battery sy...

Page 1433: ...lator see page 23 114 12 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger s side airbag inflator see page 23 115 12 4 Short to power in front passenger s side airbag inflator see pag...

Page 1434: ...see page 23 106 6 3 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 6 check battery system voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troubleshooting the...

Page 1435: ...s low repair the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs see page 23 106 7 2 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 8 check battery system voltage If volta...

Page 1436: ...s side airbag inflator see page 23 147 12 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger s side airbag inflator see page 23 149 12 4 Short to power in front passenger s side airbag...

Page 1437: ...TE Before troubleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 6 check battery system voltage If voltage is low repair the charging system before troublshooting the DTCs see page 23 202 6 3 Internal failure of SRS unit...

Page 1438: ...the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs see page 23 202 6 7 Internal failure of SRS unit NOTE Before trobleshooting DTCs 5 1 through 8 8 check battery system voltage If voltage is low rep...

Page 1439: ...irbag inflator see page 23 211 11 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver s side airbag inflator see page 23 212 11 4 Short to power in driver s side airbag inflator see page 23 214...

Page 1440: ...dicator light stays on when in SCS menu method SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting see step 1 on page 23 254 Inability to retrieve DTCs with the PGM Tester Retrieve the flash codes with the SCS mode s...

Page 1441: ...SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting see page 23 265 00 02 Models Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for Side airbag indicator light stays on after bulb check Make sure nothing is on the front pa...

Page 1442: ...te 1 The impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor 2 The microprocessor must compute the signals and must send signals to the airbag inflators 3 The inflators must ig...

Page 1443: ...n the passenger s side the passenger s side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger OPDS The side airbag system includes an Occupant Position Detection System OPDS This system consists of sen...

Page 1444: ...2 The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator s However the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger s side airbag if the SRS unit determine...

Page 1445: ...er I is linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt In a front end collision the tensioner instantly retracts the belt firmly to secure the occupants in their se...

Page 1446: ...I N D I C A T O R O P D S S E N S O R O P D S U N I T D R I V E R S U N D E R D A S H F U S E R E L A Y B O X D 4 G N D rt P O W E R S U P P L Y C I R C U I T E F R O N T A L I M P A C T S E N S O R S...

Page 1447: ...BLK XL G501 SRS INDICATOR CIRCUIT In the gauge assembly SRS INDICATOR LIGHT 1 4W FRONT PASSENGER S AIRBAG INFLATOR Uo GRN GRN YEL BLU YEL 3l I DASHBOARD BLU WIRE HARNESS SRS MAIN HARNESS GRN BRN GRN...

Page 1448: ...D INFLATOR GRN BLK YEL YEL GRN GRN GRN RED WHT PNK 3 I 4 f BLK l r GRN GRN I GRN BLK 16 I RED RED RED RED J I L i n r P4 G801 GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN BLU YEL YEL WHT RED YEL BLK BLK R S 6 1 15 I 5 I 1...

Page 1449: ...1 5 l l i L GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN WHT LTGRN RED WHT PNK GRN BLU SRS UNIT 2 LTGRN 6 I BRN 1 RED BLU RED BLU DRIVER S UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX 3 j LTGRN LT GRN BLK MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT 9 BRN DASHBOARD...

Page 1450: ...SRS Circuit Diagram cont d 00 Model Coupe BATTERY 6501 23 70...

Page 1451: ...M T GRN GRN GRN WHT GRN ORN GRN BLU YEL GRN YEL GRN GRN RED WHT RED BLU BLU GRN BLU SRS UNIT 2 I LTGRN 6 I BRN I SRS MAIN BLU RED HARNESS RIGHT SIDE WIRE HARNESS BLU LTGRN BRN RED BLU 1 I LT GRN BLK...

Page 1452: ...ELT TENSIONER RIGHT SIDE WIRE HARNESS RED YEL RED BLK RED WHT RED BLU 3 Z 3 J 0 SRS UNIT DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT SRS INDICATOR CIRCUIT SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR LIGHT F SRS INDIC...

Page 1453: ...i I i i i i f SRS 2 1 3 1 MAIN HARNESS 4 13 6 11 7 12 5 14 1 SRS UNIT DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 4 RED BLU BLU RED 2 I 6 I j LT BLU BRN LT GRN BLK With heated seat Without heated seat DRIVER S UNDER DASH...

Page 1454: ...cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel connector 6 Reconnect the batte...

Page 1455: ...ness 18P connector There should be 2 0 3 0 Q S R S M A I N H A R N E S S 18P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance as specified YES Faulty SRS unit or p...

Page 1456: ...g 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory cont d 8 Read th...

Page 1457: ...rness 18P connector A from the SRS unit 19 Check resistance between the No 1 terminal and the No 13 terminal of the SRS main harness 18P connector There should be 1 M Q or more S R S M A I N H A R N E...

Page 1458: ...e driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A cont d 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 1 4 indicated Y E S G o t o step 9 NO Short to power in the driver s airbag replace the driver s airbag s...

Page 1459: ...e SRS unit 18 Reconnect the battery negative cable 19 Turn the ignition switch ON II 20 Check for voltage between the No 1 terminal of the SRS main harness 18P connector and body ground and between th...

Page 1460: ...nutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7...

Page 1461: ...tween the No 1 terminal of the SRS main harness 18P connector and body ground and between the No 13 terminal and body ground There should be 1 M Q or more S R S M A I N H A R N E S S 18P C O N N E C T...

Page 1462: ...tch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the front passenger s airbag 2P connector from the SRS main harness 2P connector A 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 0 7 S A Z T...

Page 1463: ...RS main harness replace the SRS main harness DTC 2 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in passenger s airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II...

Page 1464: ...connector A from the cable reel 2P connector B 11 Disconnect the special tool from the SRS main harness 2P connector 12 Disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector A from the SRS unit 13 Check resi...

Page 1465: ...it for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the front passenger s airbag 2P connector from the SRS main harness 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the SRS main harness 2P connector 6 Reconne...

Page 1466: ...SRS unit see page 23 295 NO Short to power in the SRS main harness replace the SRS main harness DTC 2 5 Short to ground in passenger s airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the...

Page 1467: ...nect the special tool from the SRS main harness 2P connector 11 Disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector A from the SRS unit 12 Check resistance between the No 10 terminal of the SRS main harness...

Page 1468: ...ry system voltage is now OK ask the customer if the battery ever went dead 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light comes on for ab...

Page 1469: ...C memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off Does the SRS indicator light stay on YES Goto step 3 NO I...

Page 1470: ...age between the No 1 terminal of the SRS main harness 18P connector and body ground and between the No 13 terminal and body ground There should be 0 5 V or less S R S M A I N H A R N E S S 18P C O N N...

Page 1471: ...tor and body ground and between No 13 terminal and body ground There should be 0 5 V or less S R S M A I N H A R N E S S 18P C O N N E C T O R 3 6 7 8 9 1 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 W i r e s i d e o f f e...

Page 1472: ...t for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative c...

Page 1473: ...stance between the No 7 terminal and the No 16 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P There should be 2 0 3 0 Q S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A 18P T 1 1 n 3 4 5 6 7 r 12 13 14 15 16 1 W i r e side o...

Page 1474: ...airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory d S Read t...

Page 1475: ...terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A 0 8 P T 1 1 n 3 4 5 6 7 r 12 13 14 15 16 W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the res...

Page 1476: ...it for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negati...

Page 1477: ...nnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit 18 Reconnect the battery negative cable 19 Turn the ignition switch ON II 20 Check for voltage between the No 7 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P an...

Page 1478: ...nnect the driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 0 7 S A Z T B 4 0 1 1 A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the cable reel 2P connector 6 Reco...

Page 1479: ...ain harness 2P connector 17 Disconnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit 18 Check resistance between the No 7 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground and between the No 16 termin...

Page 1480: ...n the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the front passenger s airbag 4P connector from the SRS main harness 4P connector A d 5 Connect the s...

Page 1481: ...eased resistance in the SRS main harness replace the SRS main harness DTC 2 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in passenger s airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn...

Page 1482: ...2P connector B 11 Disconnect the special tool from the SRS main harness 2P connector 12 Disconnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit A 13 Check resistance between the No 6 and No 15 terminal...

Page 1483: ...t for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the front passenger s airbag 4P connector from the SRS main harness 4P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the SRS main harness 2P connector 6 Reconnec...

Page 1484: ...23 296 NO Short to power in the SRS main harness replace the SRS main harness d DTC 2 5 Short to ground in passenger s airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch...

Page 1485: ...ain harness 2P connector 11 Disconnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit 12 Check resistance between the No 6 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground between the No 15 terminal a...

Page 1486: ...tomer if the battery ever went dead 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off Does th...

Page 1487: ...re system is OK at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 DTC 14 1 14 2 Internal Failure of the front passenger s side impact sensor 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45...

Page 1488: ...on switch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to...

Page 1489: ...TC 11 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver s side airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light com...

Page 1490: ...ront passenger s side airbag B 11 Disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor harness 2P connector 12 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 13 Check resistance between the No 4 and...

Page 1491: ...nd wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the SRS floor harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the...

Page 1492: ...place the SRS floor harness DTC 11 5 Short to ground in driver s side airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light come...

Page 1493: ...ger s side airbag B and disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor harness 2P connector A 11 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 12 Check resistance between the No 13 and No 11 t...

Page 1494: ...ect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector A from the front passenger s side airbag B 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A Side Airbags cont d 5 Connect t...

Page 1495: ...stance in the SRS floor harness replace the SRS floor harness DTC 12 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger s side airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 T...

Page 1496: ...r harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B 11 Disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor harness 2P connector 12 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 13 Check resist...

Page 1497: ...negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector A from the front passenger s side airbag B A 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to...

Page 1498: ...Short to ground in front passenger s side airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and...

Page 1499: ...iver s side airbag B 11 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 12 Check resistance between the No 14 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P between the No 14 and No 12 terminal...

Page 1500: ...tch OFF Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B 5 Check the connection at the SRS floor harness 2...

Page 1501: ...o t o step 11 NO Open in the SRS floor harness replace the SRS floor harness 11 Check resistance between the No 11 terminal of SRS unit connector B 14P and the No 3 terminal of the special tool There...

Page 1502: ...ator light stay on Y E S G o to step 3 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the negati...

Page 1503: ...he SRS floor harness Check resistance between the No 6 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P n 1 4 5 6 7 c 11 12 13 14 W i...

Page 1504: ...page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector A from the front passenger s side airbag B A 5 C...

Page 1505: ...2 terminal of SRS unit connector B 14P and the No 3 terminal of the special tool There should be 0 1 0 2 S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P S P E C I A L T O O L Is the resistance as specified YES...

Page 1506: ...cator light stay on Y E S G o t o step 3 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the nega...

Page 1507: ...r harness 8 Check resistance between the No 7 and No 12 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P _ 1 1 n 1 4 5 6 7 r 11 12 13 14 W i r...

Page 1508: ...der dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK Y E S G o t o step 6 N O G o t o step 13 6 Disconnect OPDS unit connector D 8P from the OPDS unit B 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Check for voltage between...

Page 1509: ...relay box B 14 Turn the ignition switch ON II for 30 seconds then turn it OFF 15 Check the No 7 7 5A fuse in driver s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK YES Finished B N O G o t o step 16 16 Rep...

Page 1510: ...onnector B 26 Turn the ignition switch ON II for 30 seconds Then turn it OFF 27 Check the No 7 7 5 A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK YES Faulty OPDS unit replace the OPDS...

Page 1511: ...ness or the OPDS unit harness if the OPDS unit harness is OK replace the SRS floor harness 33 Check resistance between the No 1 terminal of SRS unit connector B 14P and No 7 terminal of OPDS unit conn...

Page 1512: ...Does the side airbag indicator stay on YES Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 If the problem is still present replace the SRS unit see page 23 296 NO Faulty side airbag...

Page 1513: ...YES Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 If the problem is still present replace the SRS unit see page 23 296 NO Goto step 36 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 Check the...

Page 1514: ...f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the voltage as specified YES Faulty OPDS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 N O G o t o step 16 16 Turn the ignition switch OFF 17 Disconnect gauge assembly c...

Page 1515: ...ss if the OPDS unit harness is OK replace the SRS floor harness 24 Turn the ignition switch OFF 25 Backprobe the No 17 terminal of gauge assembly connector B 22P Do not disconnect the connector from t...

Page 1516: ...ess A Check the connector if the connection is OK replace Tdashboard wire harness A 32 Turn the ignition switch OFF 33 Disconnect gauge assembly connector B 22P from the gauge assembly 34 Turn the ign...

Page 1517: ...harness or the OPDS unit harness if the OPDS unit harness is OK replace the SRS floor harness N O G o t o step 42 42 Turn the ignition switch OFF 43 Disconnect gauge assembly connector B 22P from the...

Page 1518: ...If one of these devices was used erase the DTC operate the device near the seat back and recheck for DTCs If DTC 15 3 is reset erase it and do not use the device near the seat back 3 Check the connect...

Page 1519: ...ctor from the driver s side airbag 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable Side Airbags 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read...

Page 1520: ...connector 16 Check resistance between the No 4 and No 13 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 2 0 3 0 Q S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P _ 1 1 1 1 1 1j v i r 1 4 5 6 7 ft 11 12...

Page 1521: ...ctor from the driver s side airbag 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is D...

Page 1522: ...harness 4P connector 17 Check resistance between No 4 and No 13 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P 1 4 5 6 7 11 12 13 14 W i r e...

Page 1523: ...river s side airbag 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the...

Page 1524: ...from the SRS unit 16 Check resistance between the No 13 and No 6 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P and between the No 13 and No 7 terminals There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C...

Page 1525: ...from the driver s side airbag B 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC...

Page 1526: ...heck resistance between the No 13 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P between the No 13 and No 12 terminals and between the No 13 terminal and body ground There should be 1 MQ or more S R...

Page 1527: ...senger s side airbag B A 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Re...

Page 1528: ...e Airbags cont d 16 Check resistance between the No 5 and No 14 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 2 0 3 0 0 S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P r I 1 4 5 6 7 I 11 12 13 14 I W i...

Page 1529: ...e front passenger s side airbag B 07TAZ SZ5011A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Rea...

Page 1530: ...nnector 16 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 17 Check resistance between the No 5 and No 14 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 MQ or more S R S U N I T C O N N...

Page 1531: ...nger s side airbag A 07XAZ S1A0200 5 Connect the special tool 2 0 connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC is...

Page 1532: ...unit 16 Check resistance between the No 14 and No 6 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P and between the No 14 and No 7 terminals There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P n...

Page 1533: ...the front passenger s side airbag B 07TAZ SZ5011A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8...

Page 1534: ...nit 16 Check resistance between the No 14 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P between the No 14 and No 12 terminals and between the No 14 terminal and body ground There should be 1 MQ or m...

Page 1535: ...e and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P connector from the driver s side airbag 5 Check the connection at the left side wire harness 2P connector and the driver s side impa...

Page 1536: ...11 terminal of SRS unit connector B 14P and the No 3 terminal of the special tool There should be 0 1 0 Q S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P SPECIAL T O O L Is the resistance as specified YES Faul...

Page 1537: ...ep 3 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 3 mi...

Page 1538: ...side wire harness replace the faulty harness 8 Check resistance between the No 6 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 MQ or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P 1 1...

Page 1539: ...and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the right side wire harness 2P connector A from the front passenger s side airbag B B A 5 Check the connection at the right side wire harness 2P connector and the f...

Page 1540: ...terminal of the special tool There should be 0 1 0 0 S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P 1 1 4 5 6 n 7 11 12 13 14 W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s S P E C I A L T O O L Is the resist...

Page 1541: ...3 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 3 minut...

Page 1542: ...wire harness replace the faulty harness 8 Check resistance between the No 7 and No 12 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P n i 1 n...

Page 1543: ...se OK Y E S G o t o step 6 IMO Go to step 13 6 Disconnect OPDS unit connector D 8P from the OPDS unit B 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Check for voltage between the No 4 terminal of OPDS unit conn...

Page 1544: ...5A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box 14 Turn the ignition switch ON II for 30 seconds then turn it OFF 15 Check the No 7 7 5A fuse in driver s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK YES...

Page 1545: ...I for 30 seconds then turn it OFF 27 Check the No 7 7 5A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK YES Faulty OPDS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 NO Short to ground in...

Page 1546: ...d Y E S G o to step 33 IMO Short to ground in the SRS main harness or in the OPDS unit harness replace the faulty harness 33 Check resistance between the No 1 terminal of SRS unit connector B 14P and...

Page 1547: ...rbag ingicator stay on Y E S Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 If the problem is still present replace the SRS unit see page 23 296 NO Faulty side airbag indicator lig...

Page 1548: ...oes the side airbag indicator light go off YES Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit replace the OPDS unit If the problem is still present replace the SRS unit B N O G o t o step 36 6 Turn the ignition switch...

Page 1549: ...voltage as specified YES Faulty OPDS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 NO Goto step 16 16 Turn the ignition switch OFF 17 Disconnect gauge assembly connector B 22P from the gauge assembly 18...

Page 1550: ...t side wire harness or the OPDS unit harness if the OPDS unit harness is OK replace the right side wire harness 24 Turn the ignition switch OFF 25 Backprobe the No 17 terminal of gauge assembly connec...

Page 1551: ...or contact at gauge assembly connector B 22P or an open in the dashboard wire harness A Check gauge assembly connector B 22P and the gauge assembly if the connection is OK replace dashboard wire harne...

Page 1552: ...ion switch ON II Does the side airbag indicator light stay off YES Short to ground in the right side wire harness or the OPDS unit harness if the OPDS unit harness is OK replace the right side wire ha...

Page 1553: ...s was used erase the DTC operate the device near the seat back and recheck for DTCs If DTC 15 3 is reset erase it and do not use the device near the seat back 3 Check the connection at the OPDS sensor...

Page 1554: ...Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 4P connector from the...

Page 1555: ...2 and the No 11 terminals of SRS connector A 18P There should be 2 0 3 0 Q S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A 18P n n 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 c r 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 i W i r e si de o f f e m a l e t e r m...

Page 1556: ...ime Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 4P connector...

Page 1557: ...tor A 18P from the SRS unit 14 Check resistance between the No 7 and the No 16 terminals and between the No 2 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit connector A 18P There should be 1 M 0 or more SRS U N I T...

Page 1558: ...rmittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 4P connector from the cable reel 4P connec...

Page 1559: ...I 15 Check for voltage between the No 7 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground between the No 16 terminal and body ground between the No 2 terminal and body ground and between the No 11...

Page 1560: ...lures see page 23 45 3 Turn the ignition switch OFF Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the driver s airbag 2P connector from the cable reel 2P connector A 0 7 X...

Page 1561: ...minal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground between the No 16 terminal and body ground between the No 2 terminal and body ground and between the No 11 terminal and body ground There should be 1...

Page 1562: ...cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the front passenger s airbag 4P connector from the SRS main harness 4P connector A 0 7 X A Z S Z 3 0 1 0 0 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connectors to the SR...

Page 1563: ...296 NO Open or increased resistance in the SRS main harness replace the SRS main harness DTC 2 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in passenger s airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory se...

Page 1564: ...tensioner 2P connectors A from the side wire harness 2P connectors B 13 Disconnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit 14 Check resistance between the No 6 and No 15 terminals and between the...

Page 1565: ...airbag 4P connector from the SRS main harness 4P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 0 connectors to the SRS main harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memor...

Page 1566: ...eplace the SRS unit see page 23 296 NO Short to power in the SRS main harness replace the SRS main harness DTC 2 5 Short to ground in passenger s airbag inflator 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45...

Page 1567: ...nect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors A from the side wire harness 2P connectors B 12 Disconnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit 13 Check resistance between the No 6 terminal of SRS u...

Page 1568: ...5 Connect the special tool 2 0 connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector cont d 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 3 1 or DTC 3 2 indicated...

Page 1569: ...t connector A 18P There should be 2 0 3 0 Q S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A 18P 1 1 1 n 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 W i r e si de o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance as...

Page 1570: ...A 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 3 3 i...

Page 1571: ...ness 4P connector 19 Check resistance between the No 8 terminal and the No 17 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A 18P _ 1 1 1 n 2 3 4 5...

Page 1572: ...1 A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 3 4 indicated Y E S G o to...

Page 1573: ...ble 20 Turn the ignition switch ON II 21 Check for voltage between the No 8 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground and between the No 17 terminal and body ground There should be 0 5 V or...

Page 1574: ...ect the special tool 2 0 connector to the left side wire harness 2P connector cont d 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 3 5 indicated Y E S G o t o ste...

Page 1575: ...19 Check resistance between the No 8 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground and between the No 17 terminal and body ground There should be 1 M 0 or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A...

Page 1576: ...nect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the right side seat belt tensioner 2P connector from the right side wire harness 2P connector A 0 7 T A Z S Z 5 0 1 1 A 5 Connect th...

Page 1577: ...harness replace the faulty harness DTC 4 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in right side seat belt tensioner 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and ch...

Page 1578: ...C 11 Disconnect SRS unit connector A 18P from the SRS unit 12 Disconnect the special tool 2 Q from the right side wire harness 2P connector 13 Check resistance between the No 9 terminal and the No 18...

Page 1579: ...and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the right side seat belt tensioner 2P connector from the right side wire harness 2P connector A 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harn...

Page 1580: ...n the S R S main harness or the right side wire harness replace the faulty harness DTC 4 5 Short to ground in right side seat belt tensioner 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition s...

Page 1581: ...rom the SRS unit 12 Disconnect the special tool from the right side wire harness 2P connector 13 Check resistance between the No 9 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and body ground and between the...

Page 1582: ...sk the customer if the battery ever went dead 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes o...

Page 1583: ...nd then goes off Does the SRS indicator light stay on YES Replace the S R S unit see page 23 299 NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page...

Page 1584: ...and clear the DTC B N O G o t o step 6 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 Disconnect the driver s power seat wire harness 3P connector with power seat or left side wire harness 3P connector without powe...

Page 1585: ...a l s Are the resistance readings as specified Y E S G o t o step 10 NO Replace the driver s seat belt buckle assembly and clear the DTC B 10 Check resistance between the No 1 terminal of the driver...

Page 1586: ...it connector C 8P to body ground with a jumper wire Turn the ignition switch ON II S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R C 8P J U M P E R W I R E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n...

Page 1587: ...e the faulty harness 20 Check resistance between the No 8 terminal of the dashboard wire harness A 8 P connector and the No 3 terminal of the driver s power seat wire harness 3 P connector with power...

Page 1588: ...connector A from the passenger s power seat wire harness 3P connector B Check resistance between the No 1 and No 3 terminals of the front passenger s seat belt buckle switch 3P connector There should...

Page 1589: ...EAT WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR OR RIGHT SIDE WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR 10 Wire side of female terminals Is the resistance reading as specified Y E S G o to step 9 NO Open in the passenger s power seat...

Page 1590: ...S E N G E R S S E A T W I R E H A R N E S S 3P C O N N E C T O R S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R C 8P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 13 Check resistance between the No...

Page 1591: ...F Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B 0 7 X A Z S 1 A 0 2 0 0 5 Connect the special tool...

Page 1592: ...NO Open or increased resistance in the SRS main harness or left side wire harness replace the faulty harness DTC 11 3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver s side airbag inflator 1 E...

Page 1593: ...the special tool from the left side wire harness 2P connector 12 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 13 Check resistance between the No 4 and No 13 terminals of S R S unit connector...

Page 1594: ...nd wait for 3 minutes 4 Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B 0 7 S A 2 T B 4 0 1 1 A 0 7 X A Z S 1 A 0 2 0 0 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Er...

Page 1595: ...e No 13 and No 7 terminals There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P p 1 4 5 i r 7 V 11 12 13 14 W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance as specif...

Page 1596: ...minutes 4 Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P connector A from the driver s side airbag B 0 7 S A Z T B 4 0 1 1 A 0 7 X A Z S 1 A O 2 O G 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC m...

Page 1597: ...nd between the No 13 terminal and body ground There should be 1 MQ or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P a 1 4 5 6 n 7 11 12 13 14 W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resi...

Page 1598: ...2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector with Side Airbags cont d 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 12 1 indicated Y E S G o t o step...

Page 1599: ...als of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 2 0 3 0 Q S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P 1 1 J 1 _ _ _ n 1 4 5 6 7 11 12 13 14 W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistanc...

Page 1600: ...Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 12 3 indicated Y E S G o to step...

Page 1601: ...19 Check resistance between the No 5 and No 14 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P There should be 1 M Q or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P n i 1 1 1 i n 1 4 5 6 7 r 11 12 13 14 W i r e s...

Page 1602: ...al tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 12 4 indicated Y E S G o t o step 9 NO Short to po...

Page 1603: ...No 14 and No 6 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14P and between the No 14 and No 7 terminals There should be 1 MO or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m...

Page 1604: ...2 0 0 5 Connect the special tool 2 Q connector to the right side wire harness 2P connector 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable 7 Erase the DTC memory 8 Read the DTC Is DTC 12 5 indicated Y E S G o...

Page 1605: ...rminals of SRS unit connector B 14P between the No 14 and No 12 terminals and between the No 14 terminal and body ground There should be 1 MO or more SRS U N I T C O N N E C T O R B 14P W i r e side o...

Page 1606: ...egative cable and wait for 3 minutes 4 Check the connection between the left side wire harness 2P connector and the driver s side impact sensor Is the connection OK Y E S G o to step 5 NO Poor contact...

Page 1607: ...main harness or left side wire harness replace the faulty harness DTC 13 4 Faulty power supply to the driver s side impact sensor 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II...

Page 1608: ...ance as specified YES Go to step 8 NO Short to ground in the SRS main harness or left side wire harness replace the faulty harness 1 8 Check resistance between the No 6 and No 11 terminals of SRS unit...

Page 1609: ...nutes 4 Check the connection between the right side wire harness 2P connector and the front passenger s side impact sensor Is the connection OK Y E S G o to step 5 NO Poor contact between the right si...

Page 1610: ...nit see page 23 296 NO Open in the right side wire harness or SRS main harness replace the faulty harness DTC 14 4 Faulty power supply to the front passenger s side impact sensor 1 Erase the DTC memor...

Page 1611: ...Y E S G o to step 8 NO Short to ground in the SRS main harness or right side wire harness replace the faulty harness 8 Check resistance between the No 7 and No 12 terminals of SRS unit connector B 14...

Page 1612: ...under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK Y E S G o to step 6 NO Go to step 13 6 Disconnect OPDS unit connector D 8P from the OPDS unit B 7 Turn the ignition switch ON II 8 Check for voltage between t...

Page 1613: ...box 14 Turn the ignition switch ON II for 30 seconds then turn it OFF 15 Check the No 7 7 5A fuse in driver s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK YES Intermittent failure system is OK at this ti...

Page 1614: ...ace the faulty harness 22 Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 23 Disconnect the side airbag connectors A 24 Disconnect SRS unit connector B 14P from the SRS unit 25 Check resi...

Page 1615: ...ct the SRS main harness 2P connector N from the driver s under dash fuse relay box 28 Reconnect the negative battery cable 29 Turn the ignition switch ON II 30 Check for voltage between the No 1 termi...

Page 1616: ...side airbag indicator light go off YES Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 If the problem is still present replace the SRS unit see page 23 296 N O G o to step 36 6 Tur...

Page 1617: ...oltage as specified YES Faulty OPDS unit replace the OPDS unit see page 23 300 N O G o t o step 16 16 Turn the ignition switch OFF 17 Disconnect gauge assembly connector B 22P from the gauge assembly...

Page 1618: ...rness or the OPDS unit harness if the OPDS unit harness is OK replace the right side wire harness 24 Turn the ignition switch OFF 25 Backprobe the No 17 terminal of gauge assembly connector B 22P Do n...

Page 1619: ...de wire harness NO Poor contact at the dashboard wire harness A 22P connector and gauge assembly connector C 22P or an open in dashboard wire harness A Check gauge assembly connector B 22P and gauge a...

Page 1620: ...assembly connector B 22P from the gauge assembly 41 Check resistance between the No 17 terminal of gauge assembly connector B 22P and body ground There should 1 MO or more GAUGE A S S E M B L Y C O N...

Page 1621: ...se the DTC operate the device near the seat back and recheck for DTCs If DTC 15 3 is reset erase it and do not use the device near the seat back 3 Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness conne...

Page 1622: ...fuse No 9 7 5A and the gauge assembly and repair Check that the SRS indicator light comes on Does the SRS indicator light come on Y E S T h e system is OK B N O G o t o step 5 5 Turn the ignition swit...

Page 1623: ...1 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 3P connector C503 and body ground D A S H B O A R D W I R E H A R N E S S 3P C O N N E C T O R C503 L 1 2 3 J L U L_ J Lb dJ T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l...

Page 1624: ...es with the SCS mode see page 23 42 A new SRS unit must sense the entire system is OK before completing its initial self test The most common cause of an incomplete self test is the failure to replace...

Page 1625: ...urn the ignition switch ON II Is there battery voltage Y E S G o t o step 11 NO Open in the SRS main harness VB line replace the harness 11 Connect the SRS main harness 18P connector terminals No 6 an...

Page 1626: ...he gauge assembly replace the gauge assembly N O G o t o step 23 17 Remove the gauge assembly Do not disconnect the connector from the gauge assembly 18 Turn the ignition switch ON II 19 Connect the N...

Page 1627: ...resistance as specified YES Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness repair the dashboard wire harness NO Short to ground in the SRS main harness replace the SRS main harness 25 Reconnect the SR...

Page 1628: ...n After Self Diagnosis but no DTCs are stored NEC SRS unit only 1 Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 2 Turn the ignition switch ON II and check that the SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 secon...

Page 1629: ...P connector and body ground There should be 1 MO or more S R S M A I N H A R N E S S 18P C O N N E C T O R 3 6 7 8 9s 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resista...

Page 1630: ...T O R 1 0 1 3 1 4 15 1 6 1 7 W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance as specified YES Short to ground in the driver s under dash fuse relay box replace the driver s under d...

Page 1631: ...N O G o t o step 18 18 Turn the ignition switch OFF 19 Disconnect the SRS main harness 2P connector A from the driver s under dash fuse relay box A 20 Check resistance between the No 1 terminal of th...

Page 1632: ...or light come on Y E S T h e system is OKM NO Short to ground in the gauge assembly replace the circuit board in the gauge assembly 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Remove the gauge assembly 7 Check f...

Page 1633: ...ower in the BLU wire of dashboard wire harness A replace dashboard wire harness AM 14 Disconnect gauge assembly connector B 22P from the gauge assembly 15 Connect a voltmeter between the No 11 termina...

Page 1634: ...hen In S C S Menu Method NOTE Inability to retrieve DTCs with the PGM Tester Retrieve the flash codes with the SCS mode see page 23 43 A new SRS unit must sense the entire system is OK before completi...

Page 1635: ...8P from the SRS unit 7 Connect a jumper wire between the No 4 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and the No 5 terminal of SRS unit connector C 8P Turn the ignition switch ON II J U M P E R W I R E S...

Page 1636: ...ly 12 Check resistance between the No 5 terminal of SRS unit connector C 8P and the No 9 terminal of gauge assembly connector C 16P There should be0 1 0 0 G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R C...

Page 1637: ...K at this time Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures see page 23 45 3 Check for a blown No 1 15A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box Is the fuse OK Y E S G o t o step 11 N O G o to st...

Page 1638: ...nd body ground There should be 1 MO or more S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A 18P n t r 3 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 16 W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 3 minutes 12 Disconnect the driver s air...

Page 1639: ...the ignition switch ON II and measure voltage Is there battery voltage YES Poor contact at the SRS main harness 18P connector or faulty SRS unit check the connector If the connector is OK replace the...

Page 1640: ...dicator light come on Y E S T h e system is OK B NO Short to ground in the gauge assembly replace the circuit board in the gauge assembly B 5 Turn the ignition switch OFF 6 Remove the gauge assembly 7...

Page 1641: ...e of dashboard wire harness A or the SRS main harness replace dashboard wire harness A or the SRS main harness 14 Disconnect gauge assembly connector B 22P from the gauge assembly 15 Connect a voltmet...

Page 1642: ...When In SCS Menu Method NOTE Inability to retrieve DTCs with the PGM Tester Retrieve the flash codes with the SCS mode see page 23 43 A new SRS unit must sense the entire system is OK before completin...

Page 1643: ...tor C 8P from the SRS unit 7 Connect the No 4 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and the No 5 terminal of SRS unit connector C 8P with a jumper wire and backprobe adapters Turn the ignition switch O...

Page 1644: ...rom the gauge assembly 12 Check resistance between the No 5 terminal of SRS unit connector C 8P and the No 9 terminal of gauge assembly connector C 16P There should be0 1 0 Q G A U G E A S S E M B L Y...

Page 1645: ...ied Y E S G o t o step 4 NO Open in the BLK wire of dashboard wire harness A or faulty body ground terminal If the body ground terminal is OK replace dashboard wire harness AM 4 Disconnect gauge assem...

Page 1646: ...L Y C O N N E C T O R C 16P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 12 X 14 15 16 B L U W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the voltage as specified YES Faulty SRS unit replace the SRS unit B NO S...

Page 1647: ...dash fuse relay box No 9 7 5A fuse line refer to the Electrical section then continue troubleshooting S P 1 2 4 5 X 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 YEL W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i...

Page 1648: ...Erase the DTC memory see page 23 45 Does the SRS indicator light go off while the DTC memory is being erased Y E S G o t o step 42 N O G o t o step 2 2 Check the No 2 10A fuse in the driver s under d...

Page 1649: ...age 23 296 N O G o t o step 15 15 Replace the No 2 10A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse relay box 16 Disconnect SRS main harness 2P connector N from the driver s under dash fuse relay box 17 Turn...

Page 1650: ...onnect the battery negative cable and wait for 3 minutes 20 Disconnect the driver s airbag 4P connector A 21 Disconnect the front passenger s 4P connector A 22 Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P c...

Page 1651: ...tween the No 4 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and the No 2 terminal of SRS main harness 2P connector N There should be 0 1 0 Q S R S M A I N H A R N E S S 2 P C O N N E C T O R N W i r e side o...

Page 1652: ...OFF 35 Disconnect the jumper wire between the No 4 terminal of SRS unit connector A 18P and the No 5 terminal of SRS unit connector C 8P 36 Check the No 2 10 A fuse in the driver s under dash fuse re...

Page 1653: ...5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22 W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance as specified YES Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge assembly or poor contact at...

Page 1654: ...refer to the Electrical section then continue troubleshooting The SRS Indicator Light Comes On for the Bulb Check Goes Off then Comes Back On After Self Diagnosis but no DTCs are stored NEC SRS unit o...

Page 1655: ...cont d 23 275...

Page 1656: ...d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is the resistance as specified Y E S Short to ground in the No 1 15A fuse circuit or faulty SRS unit check the No 1 fuse circuit If the circuit is OK replace the...

Page 1657: ...frontal airbags deployed replace these items SRS unit Deployed airbag s 01 02 Models After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed replace these items Seat belt tensioners SRS unit After...

Page 1658: ...ess panel A from the steering wheel then disconnect the connector between the cable reel 2P or 4P connector B and driver s airbag 2P or 4P connector C R 3 Remove the covers A B from the steering wheel...

Page 1659: ...cable reel 2P or 4P connector A to the driver s airbag 2P or 4P connector B then install the access panel C on the steering wheel 3 Connect the battery negative cable 4 After installing the airbag con...

Page 1660: ...or between the SRS main harness 2P or 4P connector A and front passenger s airbag 2P or 4P connector B Then remove the harness clamp C 3 Remove the four mounting nuts A from the bracket Cover the lid...

Page 1661: ...t passenger s airbag 2P or 4P connector A to the SRS main harness 2P or 4P connector B Attach the front passenger s airbag connector to the connector holder C then reinstall the glove box C B A 3 Reco...

Page 1662: ...e side airbag cover Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified torque when you replace a side airbag Make sure that the seat back cover is installed properly Improper installation may prevent pr...

Page 1663: ...should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF then disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least 3 minutes 2 C...

Page 1664: ...y airbags or side airbags including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped the airbags or side airbags must be deployed If the vehicle is still within the warranty period before deploying the airbags...

Page 1665: ...SRS floor harness B or side wire harness B 7 Cut off the airbag connector strip the ends of the airbag wires and connect the deployment tool alligator clips A to the airbag Place the deployment tool...

Page 1666: ...o be scrapped the airbags side airbags or seat belt tensioners must be deployed If the vehicle is still within the warranty period the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and or special...

Page 1667: ...A and side wire harness B 8 Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it 9 Cut off each airbag connector strip the ends of the wires and connect the deployment tool alligator clips A to the wires Pl...

Page 1668: ...ge or service it should be deployed as follows 2 Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on this page or on the tool label Position the airbag face up ou...

Page 1669: ...s 3 Remove the driver s airbag see page 23 278 4 Disconnect the connector A from the cruise control set resume switch then remove the steering wheel bolt B B A 5 Align the front wheels straight ahead...

Page 1670: ...from the column A i cont d Installation 1 Before installing the steering wheel the front wheels should be aligned straight ahead 2 Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least 3 minutes 3...

Page 1671: ...steering wheel and install the steering wheel with a new steering wheel bolt A 38 N m 3 9 k g f m 28 I b f f t 8 Install the driver s airbag see step 1 on page 23 279 9 Reconnect the battery negative...

Page 1672: ...emove the driver s airbag see page 23 278 4 Disconnect the connectors A from the cruise control set resume switch and radio remote switch then remove the steering wheel bolt B 5 Align the front wheels...

Page 1673: ...g the steering wheel the front wheels should be aligned straight ahead 2 Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least 3 minutes 3 Set the cancel sleeve A so that the projections B are align...

Page 1674: ...mark on the cable reel label points straight up Instal 279 the driver s airbag see step 1 on page 23 9 Reconnect the battery negative cable 10 After installing the cable reel confirm proper system op...

Page 1675: ...new SRS unit A with Torx bolts B then connect the SRS main harness 18P connector C to the SRS unit push it into position until it clicks NOTE When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque aft...

Page 1676: ...th Torx bolts B then connect the connectors C to the SRS unit push it into position until it clicks NOTE When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement be careful to turn the...

Page 1677: ...ee page 23 7 6 Turn up the carpet A then remove the 2 mounting bolts B and the plate C 7 Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor 8 Remove the two Torx bolts A using a...

Page 1678: ...he carpet A then remove the two clips B and the plate C 7 Disconnect the side wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor 8 Remove the two Torx bolts A using a Torx T30 bit than remove the s...

Page 1679: ...Turn up the carpet A then remove the two mounting bolts B and the plate C 7 Disconnect the side wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor 8 Remove the Torx bolt A using a Torx T30 bit the...

Page 1680: ...B and OPDS unit C A Installation 1 Place the new OPDS unit on the seat back frame Tighten the three screws A then connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors to the OPDS unit Reinstall the...

Page 1681: ...S w i t c h Circuit Troubleshooting 21 41 A C Service Valve H i g h Pressure C o m p o n e n t Location Index 21 31 A C Service Valve L o w Pressure C o m p o n e n t Location Index 21 31 A C Signal...

Page 1682: ...on Replacement 19 10 19 Brake Pedal A d j u s t m e n t 19 5 Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h Test 4 50 Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h Signal Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 11 107 Brake S h o...

Page 1683: ...o m p o n e n t Location Index Crankshaft 6 3 T i m i n g BeJt 6 3 Removal Installation T i m i n g Belt 6 18 Crankshaft Pulley Bolt C o m p o n e n t Location Index Crankshaft 6 3 T i m i n g Belt 6...

Page 1684: ...wer D o o r Locks 22 229 Test Power D o o r Locks 22 225 Door Moldings Replacement 20 164 Door Opening Trim C o m p o n e n t Location Index 20 72 Door Outer Handles Replacement Front D o o r s 20 11...

Page 1685: ...m p o n e n t Location Index 11 109 Test 11 115 Replacement 11 122 Fuel Rail C o m p o n e n t Location Index 11 109 Fuel S u p p l y S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Location Index 11 109 A d j u s t m...

Page 1686: ...ion Index 4 17 Circuit Diagram 4 18 Inspection 4 19 Ignition Wires Test Inspection 4 25 Immobilizer Indicator Replacement Immobilizer S y s t e m 22 59 Indicators 22 59 C o m p o n e n t Location Inde...

Page 1687: ...ndex 22 108 Test 22 110 M E S Memory Erase Signal Connector C o m p o n e n t Location Index 23 24 25 MIL Replacement Fuel Injection System PGM FI 22 59 Indicators 22 59 MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 11...

Page 1688: ...Outside Mirror Holders C o m p o n e n t Location Index 20 31 32 Replacement 20 33 36 Outside P o w e r Mirror Actuators Test 22 148 Replacement 22 149 151 Outside Power Mirror S w i t c h C o m p o n...

Page 1689: ...55 56 Test 21 57 Refrigerant Oil Replacement 21 32 Regulator Valve Body Disassembly Inspection Reassembly 14 163 Rocker Arm Assembly C o m p o n e n t Location Index 6 3 Removal 6 36 Disassembly Reas...

Page 1690: ...n g C o l u m n C o m p o n e n t Location Index 17 3 Removal Installation 17 25 Inspection Adjustment 17 27 S t e e r i n g Gearbox C o m p o n e n t Location Index 17 3 Inspection 17 8 R e m o v a...

Page 1691: ...lve Guides C o m p o n e n t Location Index 6 3 Inspection 6 44 Replacement 6 45 Valve Seals C o m p o n e n t Location Index 6 3 Replacement 6 16 Removal 6 43 Valve Seats Repair 6 47 Valve Springs C...

Page 1692: ...p o n e n t Location Index 22 179 Circuit D i a g r a m 22 180 W i p e r W a s h e r S w i t c h C o m p o n e n t Location Index 22 179 Test Replacement 22 185 W i r e Harnesses See first page of thi...

Page 1693: ...NOTES...

Page 1694: ...NOTES...

Page 1695: ...Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under license from America Honda Motor Co Inc License Agreement AH220...

Search results

Summary of Contents for 1998 Accord

Reviews:

Related manuals for 1998 Accord

Brands by name

Popular brands

Honda 1998 Accord, Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for 1998 Accord

Reviews:

Related manuals for 1998 Accord

Brands by name

Popular brands